EPA-R4-73-023J
November 1973
Environmental Monitoring Series
Reviews of Current  Literature
on  Analytical Methodology
and Quality Control
          No. 22
                            Office of Research and Monitoring
                            U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
                            Washington, D. C. 20460

-------
                                      NOTICE
          This bulletin is prepared monthly by the staff of the Analytical
Methodology Information Center (AMIC), Information Systems Department, Battelle,
Columbus Laboratories, Columbus, Ohio, under EPA Contract No. 68-01-1832,
to inform personnel of the Analytical Quality Control Laboratory and other
segments of the National Analytical Methods Development Research Program of
recent publications on methodology.  Personnel associated with the center are
Mr. Ralph Darby, Project Director, Mr. Robert Little, Project Leader, and
Miss Verna Holoman, Abstractor.

          The 3" x 5" format of the citations and use of card stock is intended
to facilitate removal and filing of items of interest.  Because of space limi-
tations, the index terras accompanying the citations are selected from a complete
list as representative of the important concepts presented in each article.

          Comments and suggestions regarding the content of the "Reviews" or
requests from EPA personnel to be placed on the mailing list should be directed
to the Project Officer:

                          Mr.  Luther Garrett
                          Data and Information Division
                          Office of Research and Development
                          Environmental Protection Agency
                          404 M Street, S.W.
                          Washington, B.C.   20024

-------
        REVIEWS OF CURRENT LITERATURE ON

   ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL

                    No. 22
                      By

Analytical Methodology Information Center (AMIC)
        Information Systems Department
          Battelle Memorial Institute
   505 King Avenue, Columbus, Ohio  43201

           Contract No. 68-01-1832
                 Prepared for
      OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND MONITORING
    U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
           WASHINGTON, D.C.  20460

-------
             NATIONAL ANALYTICAL METHODS DEVELOPMENT RESEARCH PROGRAM
                       ANALYTICAL QUALITY CONTROL LABORATORY
                         REVIEWS OF CURRENT LITERATURE ON
                    ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL


No. 22                                                             November, 1973


Arrangement of the citations following the major research areas of the Analytical
Quality Control Laboratory and other segments of the National Analytical Methods
Development Research Program.  Items which apply to more than one area are cross-
referenced.


                                     CONTENTS
1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS                                       Page  1-24

    Scope;  Wet chemical methods; Nutrients; NTA; Trace metals; Helium glow;
    Chromatography (thin layer, gas, liquid); Spectroscopy (atomic absorption;
    flame emission, arc-spark, visible, UV, IR, fluorescent); Radiochemistry;
    Automation of methods; Ion-specific and other probes; Mass spectrometry;
    Mass spectra; NMR; Instrument-computer interface; Chlorinated hydrocarbons
    (pesticides, PCB's, other); Trace organics; Petroleum processes (reforming,
    hydroforming, platforming, catalysts); Petroleum additives; Reduced crudes;
    Sulfur isotopes; Boiling range determination; Asphatenes and carboids;
    Weathering; Organometallics; Elemental analysis; Paraffinic distribution;
    Petroleum wastes; Water quality standards; Effluent monitoring.


2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS                                                  Page  25-48

    Scope;  Plankton; Periphyton; Macrophyton; Macroinvertebrates; Fish;
    Sample collection (grab samplers, artificial substrates); Sample
    processing (preservation, staining, automatic and manual sorting and
    counting); Organisms identification (taxonomic keys, optical and electron
    microscopy, gas chromatography, electrophoresis, karyosystematics); Biomass
    measurements (drying, freeze-drying, ashing, ATP, DNA, chlorophyll measure-
    ment, calorimetry); Metabolic rates (primary productivity, respiration,
    electron transport, nitrogen fixation); Culturing; Biomonitoring;  Bioassay;
    Bioaccumulation of hazardous materials; Community structure  (indicator
    organisms, species diversity, community stability); Mathematical models;
    Statistical analysis.

-------
3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS                                            Page 49-55

    Scope;  Pollution indicators; Waterborne pathogens; Sampling; Detection;
    Identification; Enumeration; Monitoring; Survival; Automation; Instrumenta-
    tion; Cell counting; Selective and differential media; Growth factors;
    Metabolic products; Membrane filter procedures; Microbiological standards;
    Specific bacteriophage; Fluorescent antibody techniques; Radioactive
    tracers; Antigen identification; Photomicroscopy; Optical measurements;
    Data handling, presentation, and interpretation.


4.  METHODS AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION                                 Page 56

    Scope;  Collaborative testing; Laboratory and analyst performance evaluation;
    Inter- and intralaboratory quality control; Evaluation of laboratory equip-
    ment; Statistical treatment of analytical data; Experimental design.


5.  INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT                                             Page 57-59

    Scope;  Intake systems (methods of sampling, connecting lines, wells, motors,
    pumps, mode of operation); Sensors (electro-chemical, electro-biological,
    thermodynamic, mechanical, optical, nuclear); Analyzers (analog and digital
    amplifiers, output displays); Recording systems (telemetry, data logging,
    digital data processors).
                                         ii

-------
                                                                         1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-8298
 "DETERMINATION OF TRACE FLUORINE IN BIOLOGICAL MATERIALS BY PHOTONUCLEAR ACTIVATION
 ANALYSIS", Ohno,  S.,  Suzuki,  M.f Kadota,  M., Yatazawa,  M.,  Mlkrochimlea Acta,  No.  1,
 1973, PP 61-68.

          Spinach  leaves and rice were prepared for photonuclear activation analysis of
 fluorine by freeze drying,  pulverizing,  evaporating with NaOH,  fusing the residue  with
 sodium peroxide,  dissolving the fused cake In  distilled water,  centrifuging, and
 adjusting the supernatant to pH 6-7.   Powdered soil was prepared by fusing with  sodium
 peroxide and following the  procedures used for the plant samples.  Sample solutions
 were then passed  through an Ion exchange  resin (Dowex 1X8 and 50WX8) which was dried
 and sealed In a polyethylene bag for irradiation.   Fluorine-l8 was separated by  adding
 a fluorine carrier solution and HC1 to the sample, filtering, transferring the filtrate
 to a separator funnel and extracting with dimethyldlchlorosilane In xylene.  Activity
 was then measured on  a TMC  lOO-channel pulse height analyzer and the results compared
 with those from standard solutions.   Recoveries ranged from 85  to 91 percent,  the
 detection, limit was about 0.01  mlcrogram,  and  precision was about plus or minus  11
 percent.   The extraction procedure  apparently  eliminated Interference from iodine,
 bromine,  and chlorine.   The method  is applicable to air,  water, and other environmental
 materials in addition to biological and geological materials.

 INDEX TERMS:   Fluorine,  Soil analysis, Separation  techniques, Water analysis,  Air,
       Sample  preparation, Photonuclear activation  analysis,  Rice, Spinach,  Chemical
       Interference, Precision,  Recovery,  Detection limits.
AMEC-8302
"AHIOinC EXCHAUGE SEPARATIONS OF THE ELEMENTS THAT CAM BE EXTRACTED WITH TRIBUTlfL
PHOSPHATE.  II", Koch, W., Kortcisch, J., Mikrochlmlca Acta, No.  1, 1973, PP 101-112.

         A very sensitive and selective method  for the spectrophotometric determination
of germanium has been described employing pyrocatechol violet.   Prior  to the
determination, the germanium is first accumulated by extraction  with tributyl phosphate
(TBP) and kerosene and then separated from the  co-extracted elements,  that Interfere
with the determination, by means of the strongly basic anion-exchanger Dowex 1,X8 In a
mixture consisting of §0 vol. percent TBP, 60 vol. percent methylglycol and 10 vol.
percent 12 N hydrochloric acid.  In addition it was shown that this mixture is well
suited to separate uranium quantitatively from  germanium.  The spectrophotometrlc
determination of germanium is Interfered with by V(V), Mo(VI), Ga(lII), Tl(lII),
Sb(lll), Sn(ll) and Fe(lll).  The interference  by iron can be averted  by adding
sodium-potassium tartrate.

INDEX TERMS:  Chemical analysis, Separation techniques, Spectrophotometry, Oemanlum,
      Chemical Interference.
AMIC-8304
 "DETERMINATION OF SMALL AMOUBTS OF URANIUM AFTER COHCENTRATING  THHOUGH EXTRACTIC* AKD
AICIONTC EXCHANGE  IK A  SOLVENT AGENT  SYSTEM CONTAINING  TRI-K-OCTYLPHOSPHIIIE OXIDE",
Korkisch, J.,  Koch, W.,  Mikrochlmlca Acta, No.  1,  1973, pp 157-168,

         A method has  been developed for the  separation of uranium that is based on
systematic studies of  the  behavior of uranium in various water-organic solvent  systems
containing trl-n-octylphosphine oxide (TOPO)  towards various anion forms of the
strongly basic anion exchanger Dowex 1,X8.  In  this procedure,  the uranium is
extracted from a  1 N hydrochloric  acid solution containing ascorbic acid into diethyl
ether and adsorbed from  a  mixture  consisting  of 50 vol. percent ether  (o.l N in TOPO),
!»5 vol.  percent methylglycol and 5 vol. percent 12 N hydrochloric acid on  the ion
exchanger (chlorld form).  Following elutlon  with 1 M  hydrochloric acid, the
uranium is determined  either fluorimetrlcally or  spectrophotometrically by the
thlocyanate method.  By means  of this anion exchange procedure, it is  possible  above
all to  separate the uranium from all ions Interfering  vlth its  fluorlmetrlc or
spectrophotometrie determination and also from  TOPO itself.  In particular,
consideration is  given to  the  spectrophotometrie determination  of the  uranium in the
presence of larger amounts of molybdenum, and a method was worked out  for  the removal
of this  element.   (In German)

INDEX TERMS:  Separation techniques, Pollutant  Identification,  Uranium, Tri-n-
      octylphosphine oxide, Solvent systems,   Preconcentration.
AMIC-8306
"SEPARATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF METAL DITHIZONATES BY THIN-LAYER CHROMATCGRAPHY AND
ITS APPLICATION II» TOXICOLOGICAL ANALYSIS", Tewari, S. N., Bhatt, N., Mikrochimiea
Acta. Bo. 3, 1973, PP 37T-3K>.

         A quick and reliable method has been developed for the detection of toxic
metals present In autopsy tissues and other biological materials, by complex
formation and thin-layer chromatography.  The study wae restricted to the metal Ions
which form complexes with dlthlzone and are extractable at (1) pH 1-U (i.e. Cu, Hg,
Cd) and (2) pH 6-8 (i.e. Pb, Zn, Mn, Ni, Co).  The thin-layer chromatographle
investigation was carried out on Silica Oel-G plates.  Autopsy tissues suspected of
containing Cu were treated with a chloroform solution of dithizone with the pH of the
medium being maintained between 1 and k.  Four developing agents were tested:
carbon tetrachlorlde:  chloroform (10:10, toluene, xylene, and benzene.   No spray
reagents were required as the spots of the metal complexes on the plates were colored.
The R sub f values of the common metal complexes In the U solvents and the color of
their respective spots on the TLC plates are given.

INDEX TERMS:  Separation techniques, Pollutant identification, Heavy metals, Methodology,
      Solvent extractions, Chemical analysis, Toxins, Thin layer chromatography.
      Biological materials, Organic solvents. Metal dlthizonates, Cooplexation,
      Toxicology.

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMXC-8311
 "PYRIDINE KETOXIMES AS ANALYTICAL REAGENTS:  THE SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC DETERMIHATIOH OF
 COBALT WITH 2-Pn»IDYL-2-THIEIIYL-BETA-KETOXIME", Notenboom, H. R., Holland, W. J.,
 Blllingiurst, R. G., Mikrochimlca Acta. No. 3, 1973, pp 1467-1*73.

           The synthesis and characterization of 2-pyridyl-2-thlenyl-beta-ketoxlme (I)
 and its application to the spectrophotoraetrlc determination of trace amounts of
 cobalt by extraction of the resulting chelate from strong hydrochloric acid solution
 Into chloroform are described.  Under the conditions of analysis the chelate has a
 maximum absorbance of 1*12 ran with a molar absorptivity of 20,000 and a Sandell
 sensitivity of 0.0029 mlcrogram/sq cm.  The optimal pH range for chelate formation
 was 7.0-10.8; the addition of sufficient HC1 to make the sample solution 1.2-3.U M
 gave reproducible results.  The Co chelate in 3 M HC1 was stable for at least one week
 and the chloroform extracts for at least 2 hours.   As little as 0.5 ml of reagent
 solution gave reproducible results.   The chelate was completely extractable into
 chloroform and dichloromethane, partially extractable into methyl isobutyl ketoae and
 benzene and non-extractable into hexane and carbon tetrachloride.  A large number of
 ions did not interfere with the analysis; however,  permanganate, chromate, disodium
 EDTA,  fluoride,  palladium, and platinum (2 and U plus) Ions seriously interfered and
 must be absent from all determinations.

 INDEX TERMS:   Spectrophotonietry,  Cobalt, Pollutant identification. Aqueous solutions,
       Chemical analysis,  Chrojnogenic reagents,  2-Pyridyl-2-thienyl-beta-ketoxlme,
       Trace  levels, Chemical concentration,  Ionic  interference,  Metal chelates,  Sample
       preparation,  Precision,  Accuracy,  Chemical concentration.
AMIC-8561
 "SOW CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE  HISSISSIPPI RIVER BORDERIHG IOWA",
 McDonald, D. B.,  In:  Water 1972. AIChE  Symposium No.  129,  Vol.  69,  1973,  p  280-372.

         The portion of the Mississippi  River which borders Iowa contains  a  variety of
habitats, such as main channel, off-channel,  lake, and slough  areas, which support a
wide variety of fish of sport and commercial  significance.   Over 50  species  were
 identified in pool lU alone.  Studies of the  water chemistry Indicate  that the water
quality is good compared to streams within the state although  there  are limited
 stretches of river where deteriorated water quality conditions occur.   Pollutants may
also be introduced into the river as a result of runoff from agricultural  land.  Oxygen
concentrations are usually  adequate for  fish  life; however,  low  dissolved  oxygen levels
have been observed In slough areas accompanying  the death and  decay  of large algal
masses.

INDEX TERMS:  Mississippi River, Water quality,  Freshwater  fish, Aquatic habitats,
      Water pollution effects.
 AKEC-6781
 "OHJANIC POLUUTAHT rDENTIFICATION UTILIZING MASS SPECTROMETFY ",  McOulre,  J.  M.,
 Alford,  A.  L,, Carter,  M.  H.,  U.  S.  Environmental Protection Agency,  Southeast
 Environmental Research  Laboratory, Athens,  Georgia,  Report No. EPA-F2-732314-, July 1973,
 5l» pp.

          A  system  has been developed for the rapid identification of  volatile
 organic  water pollutants.   It  Involves  gas  chromatography/nass spectrometry
 with  computerized  matching of  mass spectra.  Application of this system to the
 analysis of waste  effluents revealed a  significant number  of pollutants that were
 not previously known to be present.

 INDEX TERMS:  Pollutant identification, Organic compounds,  Polychlorinated biphenyls,
      Industrial wastes, Effluents, Organic pesticides, Computer programs, Data
      processing.  Synthetic rubber, Organic wastes, Chemical  analysis, GC-ffess
      spectrcmetry, Coal gasification, Data Interpretation.
AMIC-8961*
 'EXTRACTION AND SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC DETERMINATION OF VANADIUM AS A MIXED LIGAKD COMPLEX
OF OXINE AND AZIDE", Rao, V. P. R., Anjaneyulu, Y., Mikrochimica Aeta, No. U,  1973,
pp 1481.1*90.

         Vanadium, oxlne and azide react at pH 3.5-'*.5 to give a dark green solid which
extracts into benzene giving dark green solution.  The extract has absorption maxima at
1*15 nm and 620 nm with molar absorptlvitles 8650 and 60^0 respectively.
Spectrophotometric investigations reveal that the extracting species has V, HOx, and
H3(-) In the ratio 1 to 2 to 2.  Beer's law is obeyed up to 8.10 micrograms and
10.50 mlcrograms of vanadium per ml at U15 nm and 620 nm, respectively.  The
sensitivity of the color reaction is O.OO65 mlcrogram per sq cm at 1*15 nm and 0.009
nlcrogram per sq cm at 620 nm.   The percent extraction of V was found to be 90.  The
formation constant and the free energy of formation are 8.3 to 8.7 times 10 to the 6th
power and -9.91 to -9.31 Cal respectively at 30 C.  The interference of various foreign
ions was studied and methods are proposed for the elimination of the interference of
some of those substances.   Infrared and magnetic data of the solid complex are given.

INDEX TERMS:   Separation techniques, Spectrophotonietry,  Aqueous solutions, Vanadium,
      Complexation, Sensitivity.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9137
 "NITROGEN SOURCES AND CYCLING IN NATURAL WATERS", Brezonik, P. L., University of
 Florida, Department of Environmental Engineering, Gainesville, Florida, Report Ho.
 EPA-660/3-73-002, July 1973, 177 pp.

          Sources of nitrogen were reviewed to determine their significance In
 lacustrine budgets.  Nutrients in rainfall were found significant although their
 variability obviates precise conclusions.  Using literature values for nutrient export
 from various land uses, nutrient budgets were calculated for 55 Florida lakes.   Critical
 N and P loading rates (above which eutrophication is likely) were estimated from the
 calculated budgets and lake trophic conditions.  Algal fixation in two eutrophic Florida
 lakes was studied in detail; the total annual N fixed and factors affecting the
 occurrence of fixation were evaluated.  A survey of fixation in 55 Florida lakes showed
 significant fixation only in eutrophic lakes.   Bacterial fixation in the anoxic
 hypoliinnlon of a small lake contributed substantial nitrogen to the lake, and N fixing
 activity was found In both estuarine and lacustrine sediments.  The acetylene reduction
 assay for N fixation was evaluated; short incubations were found essential.   Reduction
 was light dependent and N2 acted as a competitive inhibitor.  A preliminary experiment
 suggested that lacustrine sediments act as ammonia buffers; estuarine sediment sorbed
 ammonia strongly with little tendency to release anmonla to the water.  Interferences
 from high organic color were evaluated for automated inorganic N and P analytical
 methods.   Various amino acids were also shown to interfere with the indophenol ammonia
 procedure.
 INDEX TERMS:   Nitrogen,  Cycling nutrients, Eutrophication, Nitrogen fixation,  Lakes,
       Water pollution sources,  Limnology, Water quality, Natural waters, Nutrient
       sources,  Nutrient budget,  Acetylene reduction,  Nitrogen cycle, Organic nitrogen.
AMIC-91UO
"DISTRIBUTION OF CAESIUM-137 IN BRITISH  COASTAL WATERS",  Jefferies,  D.  F.,  Preston, A.,
Steele, A. K., Marine  Pollution Bulj-etin, Vol.  U, No.  U,  August 1973, PP 118-122.
         Water samples were  collected from  the  Irish Sea, the northeaat Atlantic,
Scottish coastal waters, and the North Sea  for  analysis of Cs-137 emulating from the
Wlndscale nuclear fuel reprocessing plant for the purpose of determining distribution
patterns and dilution  of this effluent.  Cs-137 was determined by filtering seawater
through a 0.22-mllllinicron membrane filter  using one-step separation with either amaonium
dodeca-molybdophosphate or potassium  cobaltlhexacyanoferrate followed by gamma
spectrometry.  More than 90  percent of the  total cesium was retained In the filtrate.
The data suggest that  water  leaving the  Irish Sea through the North  Channel more* roan*
the coastline in a clockwise direction closely  confined to the coastal  margins of
.Scotland and then enters the northern North Sea, where  its southern  penetration nay be
detected as far south  as the northern coast of  England.   This type of distribution has
far-reaching implications for the  fate of materials Introduced to coastal waters since
even Cs-137, which is  relatively conservative in seawater,  is largely confined In Its
distribution to inshore waters.  Those materials which  are less conservative and thus
more rapidly removed from the  water mass will be even more restricted in their
distribution as a consequence.   These general conclusions confirm once  more  the need to
concentrate monitoring and surveillance operations in coastal waters, since  the majority
of pollutants are Introduced regularly and  in largest quantity at or near the shoreline.

INDEX TERMS:  Distribution patterns.  Radioactive wastes,  Coasts,  Water  analysis, Sea
      water, Waste dilution, Separation techniques, Cesium-137, Gamma speetrcmetry.
 AMIC-9188
 "ANALYTICAL APPLICATIONS O? GAS CHROMATCGRAPHY OF METAL CHELATES", Barratt, R. S.,
             of the Society for Analytical Chemistry.  Vol.  10,  No. 7, July 1973,
 pp Io7-17<

          A general suranary is given of methods of ehelating metals,  namely Be, Cr,  Nl,
 Cu, and Co for analysis by gas chromatography.  Chelating agents, recovery, detection
 limits,  interferences,  and chemical structures of several chelates are discussed.   The
 use of gas chronatography for determination of chloride Ions is also described.

 INDEX TERMSS   Heavy metals, Beryllium,  Gas chromatography,  Chlorides,  Chelation,
       Chromium, Nickel, Copper, Cobalt, Detection limits, Recovery,  Chemical
       interference.
 AfflC-9195
 "DETERMINATION OF TRACE AMOUNTS OF CHROMIUM BY ATOMIC ABSORPTION  SPECTROMBTRY WITH  A
 TANTALUM FILAMENT ATOMIZER", Maruta, T., Takeuchi, T., Analytlca  Chimica Acta,  Vol.  66,
 No.  1, August  1973,  PP 5-V1.

          The effect  of various foreign Ions on chromium absorption  in  atomic absorption
 spectrometry was  examined with a modified tantalum filament itomizer.  The  sample
 solution containing  Cr was vaporized and atomized from a tantalum filament  by electrical
 heating  into an argon  stream within an absorption chamber.  All atomic absorption
 signals  were recorded  with the height of the absorption signal being used to determine
 the  concentration of Cr,  The highest absorption signal was obtained when the filament
 temperature level (1650 degrees) was the lowest.  The detection limit  of this method was
 found to be 0.9U  pg  and the sensitivity was 0.52 pg.  Ten determinations using  6 ppm Cr
 solution gave  a coefficient of variation of 2.8 percent.  The effects  of 100-,  50-  or
 10-fold  weights of 12  different metal ions on the absorption signal in a 6  ppm  Cr
 solution were  measured at various temperatures.  No Interferences of Fe, Cu, Mn, Al  or
 Ha were  observed  irrespective both of concentrations and filament temperature levels; Fe
 did  not  interfere even at a 300-fold amount.  No interference wis observed  at the
 10-fold  level  with the exception of alkaline earth elements and V.  The proposed
 technique is very rapid as a complete single analysis of the aqueous sample requires
 only 2 min.  There are no memory effects between determinations.  The most  prominent
 advantages of  the proposed method of atomization are Its high sensitivity,  simplicity
 and  rapidity.
 DIDEX TERMS:  Chromium, Aqueous solutions, Pollutant identification. Heavy metals,
      Chemical analysis,  Alkaline earth metals. Temperature, Atomic absorption
      spectrophotometry.  Ionic Interference, Tantalum filament atomizer, Precision,
	Detection limits. Sensitivity.	

-------
                                                                         1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9211
 "EXTRACTION OF BORIC ACID WITH ALIPHATIC 1,3J>IOLS AND OTHEB CHELATIHG AGESTS",
 Egneus, B., Uppstrom, L., Analytlca Chlmlea Acta,  Vol.  66,  No.  2, September 1973,
 pp 211-229.

          Some UO compounds have teen investigated  with reference to their boric  acid
 extraction properties.  Preliminary tests showed that aliphatic 1,3-diols with at  least
 6 carbon atoms possess  superior extraction qualities  compared to diketones,
 hydroxyketones,  hydroxyamlnes  and other species  investigated.   The 1,3-dlols were  then
 further studied with attention to size and steric  configuration.   The extraction
 equilibria involved  were  thoroughly investigated for  2,2-diphenylpropanedlol-l,3 (DPPD).
 The constants  derived showed that this diol,  in  spite of its large hydrophobia groups,
 has a smaller  reaction  constant than the previously investigated 2,2-diethylpropanediol-
 1,3 (DEPD)  and 2-ethylhexanediol-l,3 (TMPD),  which seems to form a very stable ester witt
 boric acid  in  chloroform  at room temperature.  The ester formation is supported  by
 n.m.r. and  i.r.  spectra.   The  effect of gemlnal  substltuents in the 2-position is
 discussed.

 INDEX TERM:  Separation techniques,  Solvent extractions,  Methodology,  Aqueous solutions,
      Chelation, Boron, Chemical properties, Boric  acid,  Chelatlng agents, Chemical
      recovery, Aliphatic  1 3-diols,  Infrared spectra, HMR  spectra. Ultraviolet  spectra.
      Aliphatic hydrocarbons, Reagents,  Organic  solvents, Esteriflcatlon,  Ketonea,
      Amines.
AMIC-9215
"ATOMIC ABSORPTION ABE FLUORESCENCE  SFECTPOMETRY WITH A CARBON FILAMENT ATOM
RESERVOIR.  PART XIV.  THE DETERMINATION OF VANADIUM IN FUEL OILS",  Everett, G.  L.,
West, T. S., Williams, R. W., Analytica Chimica Acta,  Vol.  66, No. 2,  September  1973,
pp 301-303.

         The carbon filament atom reservoir technique for determining  vanadium in
aqueous media and Cu, Ag, and Ni  In  lubricating oils has been extended to  Include
vanadium In petroleum products.   A 10-ml sample solution was shaken  with 2 M HC1 for 5
mln and separated.  0.1 percent l-(2-pyrldyl-azo-2-rwphthol)  (PAN) in  ethanol  was added
to the acid layer and the pH adjusted to U.O with concentrated ammonia.  The
vanadium-PAN complex was then extracted with chloroform and analyzed.  This method has
an overall extraction efficiency  of  greater than 95  percent;  the detection limit of V in
the original sample is 0.007 ppm  (w/w).  The sensitivity of the method (1  percent abs.)
was 0.013 pg and the detection limit (S:N equals 2)  was 0.03 Pg;  the reproduclbility for
15 replicates at the 10-ng level  was plus or minus U percent.

INDEX TERMS:  Chemical analysis,  Pollutant  Identification,  Instrumentation, Solvent
      extractions, Petroleum products, Fuel oil, Atomic  absorption spectrophotometry,
      Fluorescence spectrophotometry, Carbon filament atom  reservoir, Vanadium,
      Beproduclblllty, Precision,  Detection limits,  Sensitivity,  Acid  stripping.
AMIC-9221
 "EETERHIHATIOB OF Z.IMC BY FLAWLESS ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROPHOTOMETRY", Kurz, D.,
Roach, J., Eyrlng, E. J., Analytical Biochemistry, Vol. 53, No. 2, June 1973, PP
586-593.

         The flaoeless atomic absorption method described is a simple, rapid, accurate
microtechnique for determining zinc in aqueous solutions, serum, or urine.  It requires
no  sample pretreatment, only 1.0 microliter of sample per determination, no correction
for viscosity differences between sample and standard solutions, and is not subject to
ionic or organic Interference,  The average recovery of added zinc in serum is 97.5
percent and in urine is 97.6 percent.  The values obtained for serum (mean plus or minus
SD:  9^.6 plus or minus 11.0 micrograms/lOO ml; N equals 25) and urine (range:  6OO-10OO
micrograms/2U hr; H equals U) are comparable to the values reported in the literature.
The coefficient of variation was less than 5-0 percent in all cases.   The qualitative
concentration limit was 0.009 microgram/100 ml.  The techniques and instrumentation
described are also applicable to a number of trace minerals of common interest.

INDEX TERMS:  Zinc, Aqueous solutions,  Chemical analysis,  Urine,  Instrumentation,
      Pollutant identification, Anions,  Cations,  Biological samples,  Flameless atomic
      absorption spectrophotometry,  Serum,  Ionic interference,  Chemical recovery,
      Sample preparation.
AMICJ9826
"ION-EXCHANGE SEPARATIOHS ON MIXED COLUMNS",  Yambe,  T.,  Journal of Chromatography,
Vol. 83, August 29, 1973, pp 59-65.

         The separation of metal ions by elution with a solution containing a
chelate-forming agent, namely an organic hydroxy acid (lactic  icid or tartaric acid)
was investigated by changing the mixing ratio (gamma) of  the cation- and anion-exchange
resins and by changing the pH of the  eluent.   When  the concentration of  lactic acid was
0.5 M at pH 2.8 and gamma equals 1/2,  a mixed sample  of Lu, Tm,  Er,  Ho,  Dy,  Tb and Od was
completely separated within 100 mln.   When the concentration of  tartaric acid was  0.25 M
at pH 3.0 and gamma equals 2, a mixed sample  of Cu, Zn, Pb, Co end Cd was completely
separated within 90 min.

INDEX TERMS:  Separation techniques,  Cations,  Heavy metals, Anion exchange,  Cation
      exchange,  Hydrogen ion concentration, Mixed columns, Ion exchange  chromatography,
      Ion exchange resins, Elution, Organic hydroxy acids, Rare  earth elements,
      Lactic acid,  Tartaric acid,  Chelating agents.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMXC-9231
 "POTENTIALITY OF TOE COUFLIHG OF COLUMS LIQUID CHROMATOGRAFHY AMD FIELD DESORPTIOH
 MASS  SPECTROMETW", Schulten, H.-R., Beckey, H. D., Journal of Chromtography,
 Vol.  83, August 29, 1973, PP 315-320.

          The first use of column liquid chromatography in combination with field
 desorptlon mass spectrometry Is exemplified by the separation and identification of
 the components of a steroid mixture extracted from rat serum.  There are two main
 reasons for the high-molecular-ion intensities obtained:  (l) the smaller transferred
 energy In the field ionization process compared with other lonlzatlon modes increases
 the chance of detecting the Intact molecular Ions; and (2) the samples are not
 Introduced via the comnonly used direct Introduction system for evaporation, but are
 applied to the field ion emitter from a solution using the emitter dipping technique.
 Hence ionization and desorptlon of the adsorbed molecules can be performed with
 minimum thermal stress.   Potential applications for the coupling of liquid
 chromatography and field desorptlon mass spectrometry are discussed, especially la
 relation to the handling of the sample and the limits of detection.

 IBDEX TERMS:   Separation techniques,  Organic compounds, Pollutant identification.
       Column liquid chrometography,  Field desorptlon mass spectrometry,  Sample
       preparation,  FD mass  spectra,  Detection limits, Steroids,  Molecular ions.
AMIC-9235
 "A HIGH-SPEED LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPH UITH A FUV-SFECTROFLUORIMBTRIC DETECTOR AHD THE
ULTRAMICRO-DETERMINATION OF AROMATIC COMPOUNDS",  Hatano,  H.,  Yamamoto, Y.,  Sat to,  M.,
et al., Journal of Chromatography,  Vol.  83, August  29,  1973,  PP 373-380.

         A high-speed liquid chrotnatograph has been used  with a new spectrofluorimetrlc
detector, which is more sensitive  than a normal ultraviolet absorption or
spectrophotometric detector for fluorescent compounds.  The spectrofluorimeter  is
equipped with double-beam optics and with a flow-cell,  3  microliters in volume,  and  is
used to record the emission and excitation spectra  of the separated components  during
the chrcoatographlc  separation by  stopping the elutlon  at peak maxima.  This
technique embles both qualitative  identification and quantitative determination of  the
separated components.  Selective recording of  chromatograms is possible by  varying the
wavelengths for emission and excitation.   The  technique Is demonstrated using mixtures
of vitamins B2, B3,  and B6, and of  naphthalene, anthracene, pyrene,  benz(a)anthracene,
benz(a)pyrene and benz( e)pyrene have been separated and Identified.

mDEX TERMS:  Instrumentation, Chemical analysis, Aromatic compounds. Pollutant
      identification, Organic compounds, Laboratory equipment,  Separation technique*.
      High speed liquid chromatography, Flow spectrofluorimetrlc detector,  Quantitative
      analysis, Spectrofluorimetry,  Trace  levels, Sensitivity.
 AMIC-92to
 "MICRODETERMIHATIO1I OF ARSEHIC(lII) AND OSMIUM(VIII) THROUGH OSMIUM-THTOUREA
 REACTT05", Kaldu, P. P., Rao, G. 0., Mjcrochemical Journal. Vol. 18,  No. l», August
 1973, PP 422-1*27.

          The osmium-thiourea reaction described in previous methods for the
 determination osmium and arsenic was slow under the conditions utilized.  A new method
 has been proposed for the rapid determination of osmium without waiting 30 minutes for
 the attainment of full color intensity.   With this procedure only 1 ml of 1 percent
 thiourea is necessary.  It was observed that arsenic(lll)  catalyzed the reaction.
 Based on this,  qualitative and quantitative  methods are described for the determination
 of both osmium and arsenic.   Interference study of 30  ions showed they do not
 interfere.

 IBDEX TERMS:  Chemical analysis, Aqueous  solutions,  Pollutant  identification. Chemical
       reactions,  Color reactions, Spectrophotometry, Cations, Anlono, Alkali metals,
       Alkaline  earth metals,  Heavy metals, Arsenic,  Osmium,  Trace  levels,
       Quantitative  analysis,  Ionic  Interference, Accuracy.
AMIC-92U2
 "APPLICATIONS, INVOLVING THE IODIDE ION.  VIII.  DIRECT AND INDIFECT DETERMINATION OF
MERCURY(I) AMD AKALYSIS OF MIXTURES.  ANALYSIS OF CHFOMIUM(VI)-CHROMIUM(lII) MIXTURES.
DETERMISATKW OF HYPOCHLORITE ", Khalifa, H., Issa, Y. M., MJcrochemieal Journal.
Vol. 18, Ho. k, August 1973, pp U36-W*.                  	

         Mereury(I), down to 3 PPm, has been accurately determined by direct titratlon
with iodide or by back-titrating excess of iodide with mercury(ll) using silver amalgam
as the indicator electrode.  Tlje direct method and additional volumetric ones were
applied to the rapid analysis of various mixtures involving mercury(l) with fair
accuracy and precision.  Analysis of Cr(VI)-Cr(lII) mixtures Involved potentiometric
back-titration of excess iodide and of excess EDTA separately with mercury(ll).
Back-tltratlon of excess iodide was successfully applied to the determination of
hypochlorite.

IHDEX TERMS:  Mercury,  Volumetric analysis,  Chromium, Methodology, Iodides, Heavy metals,
      Aqueous solutions. Chemical analysis,  Pollutant identification,  Potentiometric
      tltration,  Hypochlorites, Mixtures,  Accuracy, Precision,  Detection limits.

-------
                                                                          1.   PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL METHODS
 A MIC-9268
  "CURRENT STATUS OF IKE ENVIRONMENTAL AND HUMAN SAFETY ASPECTS OF NITRIIXJTRIACETIC
 ACID  (NTA)", Thayer, P. S., Kenaler, C. J., CRC Critical Reviews in Environmental
 Control.  Vol. 3, No. U, September 1973, PP 375-tOH.

           A review of the available experimental and field information on nitrllotrlace-
 tlc acid (NTA) Indicates a. very low probability of environmental or human hazard at the
 maximally proposed levels of use in detergents.  The probable average concentrations
 will be low, less than 25 parts per billion (ppb), in the domestic water supply and the
 high concentrations, 1,500 to 20,000 parts per million (ppm), required to produce
 adverse effects in animals appear to provide a more than adequate margin for safety.
 The probable effects on the environment, including contribution towards eutrophication
 of estuarine bodies of water,  also appear to be minimal.  The use of NTA in
 detergents should, however, be accompanied (1) by an environmental surveillance program
 to ensure that the probable low concentrations of NTA are the actual concentrations,
 and (2) a continuing research program to further assure environmental and human safety.

 INDEX TERMS:   Nitrilotrlacetic acid. Environmental effects,  Pollutant identification,
       Reviews,  Public health,  Biodegradation, Toxicity, Water pollution effects. Soil
       contamination effects,  Surface waters.  Mater pollution Sources, Fate of
       pollutants,  Sensitivity, NTA chelates,  Degradation products,  Substrate
       utilization,  Degradation pathways, Mobilization, Enzymatic inhibitors,
       Teratogenlclty,  Mutagenicity,  Carcinogenic!ty,  Metabolism, Animal physiology,
      Water pollution,  Measurement,  Path of pollutants, Sewage effluents,  Sewage
       treatment, Rivers,  Streams,  Organic loading,  Eutrophication,  Plant growth.
AMIC-9270
"THE USE AND EFFECT OF MIXED  STANDARDS OF THE  QUANTITATION OF POLYCHLORINA1ED
BIPHENYLS", Beezhold, F. L.,  Stout,  V. F., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination
and Toxicology. Vol. 10, No.  1,  July 1973, PP  10-15.
         A  study was made  of  the  problems encountered when the chrcmatograa of a sample
being analyzed for  PCB's via  GLC  cannot  readily be  compared to a particular Aroelor
standard.  The use  of mixed Aroelor  standards was proposed and a study made of the
effect of mixed standards  on  the  analytical results.   It was found that  the choice  of a
standard could alter the values by more  than a  factor of 2.   In addition, the  particular
mixture used as a standard should be reported along with resulting values.

INDEX TERMS:  Polychlorinated biphenyls,  Pollutant  Identification,  Separation
      techniques, Aroclors, Chemical analysis, Quantitative  analysis,  Mixed standards,
      Animal tissues.
 AMIC-9273
 "POLYCHLORINATED TERPHENYLS IN PAPERBOARD SAMPLES", Thomas, G.  H., Reynolds, L. M.,
 Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 10,  No. 1,  July 1973,
 PP 38-U1.

          The detection,  estimation,  and confirmation of the Identity of
 polychloroterphenyls (PCTs) as well  as polychlorobiphenyls (PCBs) are described for
 paperboard and food packaging material.   The sample is blended, and an aliquot Soxhlet
 extracted,  concentrated, cleaned-up  on Florisil,  and subjected  to a 'PCB split1 on
 Florlsil.  For waxy samples,  the  residue from extraction is dissolved in 5 percent
 benzene in acetone with  slight warming;  the solution chilled in a dry ice/methanol  bath
 for 3 mln;  the flocculent precipitate  filtered; and the filtrate  concentrated and
 treated as  above.   The PCT content of  cleaned-up  sample extracts  is screened and
 quantified using gas chromatography.   Approximately 100 paperboard samples have been
 analyzed with PCT levels of 0-163 ppm  and PCB levels of 0-20 ppn.   Two satisfactory gas
 chromatography systems have been  developed for the  estimation of  PCTs.

 INDEX TERMS:   Chemical analysis,  Pollutant  identification,  Polychlorinated biphenyls,
       Gas chromatography.  Methodology, Estimating,  Polychlorinated terphenyls,
       Paperboard,  Packaging materials. Sample preparation.
AMIC-93T5
 "THE DETERMINATION OF PEHTACHLOROPHENOL AND HEXACHLOROPHENE IN HUMAN ADIPOSE TISSUE",
Shafik, T. M., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 10, No.
1, July 1973, PP 57-63.

         A method was developed for determining low levels of pentachlorophenol
(PCP) and hexachlorophene (HCP) in human adipose tissue.  20O mg of adipose tissue
were accurately weighed into a Duall tissue grinder to which hexane was added.  The
sample was mixed on a Vortex mixer and allowed to stand for about 30 min.  The sample
was then ground, washed with hexane, and combined with 10 percent NaCH.  This mixture
was then mixed on the Vortex mixer for 1 mln and centrifuged to separate the 2 layers.
Several extractions with hexane and diethyl ether were carried with the final hexane
extract containing ethylated PCP and HCP being transferred to a silica gel mlcrocolumn
for separation.  Identification was made by electron capture gas chromatcgraphy.
Confirmation of the diethyl ether of hexachlorophene and the ethyl ether of
pentachlorophenol was accomplished by mass spectral direct probe analysis.  The limits
of detectability for PCP and HCP In adipose tissue are 5 and 10 ppb, respectively.
Samples fron the pooled human fat weighing 100-300 mg were analyzed for both PCP and HCP
using the procedure described in the analysis of adipose tissue.  An average of 5 ppb
PCP was found in six replicates and 30 ppb HCP in 1O replicates of human adipose tissue.
Replicate samples of the pooled fat (100-3OO mg) were spiked with **.6 ng PCP and 10 ng
HCP.   The average recoveries of PCP and HCP frco the replicates analyzed were 75 percent
and 96 percent, respectively.
IMEEX TERMS:   Chemical analysis, Pollutant identification, Mass spectrometry, Electron
      capture gas chromatography,  Adipose tissue, Pentachlorophenol, Trace levels,
      Quantitative analysis, Hexachlorophene.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9276
 "tNTERCAIJBRATION OF ANALYSES OF RECENTLY BIOSYMTHESIZED HYDROCARBONS AND PETROLEUM
 HYDROCARBONS IN MARINE LIPIDS",  Farrlngton,  J.  W.,  Teal, J.  M.,  Quinn,  J.  G.,  et al.,
 Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology,  Vol. 10, No.  3i  September 1973,
 pp 129-136.'

          An Intel-calibration exercise has been  conducted to  determine the  accuracy and
 precision of hydrocarbon analyses.   Column chromatography or thin layer chromatography
 was used to isolate the hydrocarbons from other lipids.   Gas chronB tography  was  then
 used as n screening method to select hydrocarbon extracts which  would be further
 analyzed by GC-mass spectrometry and other combinations  of spectrophotometric  and wet
 chemistry methods to determine the  concentration of petroleum hydrocarbons in  the
 samples.   The presence or absence of the unresolved complex  mixture signal in  the
 hydrocarbon gas chromatograms served as the initial criterion for determining
 petroleum contamination.   A homologous series of peaks In the chromatograms  provided
 supplemental evidence of petroleum  contamination which was then  confirmed  analytically.
 Three laboratories analyzed e reference sample  (IDOE-5)  consisting Of cod  liver  lipids
 spiked with 371.8 ppm of a distillate cut (n-Cl6 to n-C26) of South Louisiana  crude oil.
 The results were fairly accurate and agreed very well for the concentrations of  both
 petroleum and recently biosynthesized pristane  and  squalene.   Using GC  as  the  initial
 screening method is fairly accurate and precise for hydrocarbons in the  boiling  range
 207-^50 C  with a polarity suitable  for column or thin layer  chroraatographic  isolations.
 The methods as employed here would  not detect asphaltenes; O,  N,  S containing
 aliphatic  and cyclic  compounds;  nor concentrations  of hydrocarbons much  above  or below
 the boiling range specified above.
AKLC-9276 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS:  Lipids, Methodology, Calibrations, Pollutant identification, Isolation,
      Natural organics, Marine environment, Interlaboratory studies, Flajne ionization
      i^a chromatography, Petroleum hydrocarbons, Chemical composition, Chemical
      concentration, Column chronatography, Thin layer cnronatography. Accuracy,
      Precision, Sample preparation.
                    AMIC-9881"
                    "VOLTAWETRIC  IDENTIFICATION OF ORGANOCHLORINE INSECTICIDES,  POLYCHLOHIHAtED
                    BIPHEWLS,  TOLYCHLORIHATED NAPHTHALENES AND POLYCHLORINATED BENZENES",  Farwell,
                    S.  0., Belaud, F. A., Gear,  S.  D.,  Bulletin of Environmental  Contamination and
                    Toxicology, Vol. 10, No.  3,  September  1973,  PP 157-165.

                             The need for an  analytical method  which would provide  for  the  exact
                    identification or  'fingerprinting'  of  chlorinated hydrocarbons  in the environment
                    prompted  the study of the possibility  of using a voltanmtric detector.  This  detector
                    could provide both gross  classification, such  as distinguishing between polychlorinated
                    biphenyls (PCB) and polychlorinated naphthalenes (PCH), and identification of  the
                    specific  isooer in each class of compound.   This research represents  the first in  the
                    voltanmetric reduction of PCB's and PCN's and  provides a preliminary  description of
                    the analytical methodology applicable  to the rapid identification of  these compounds.
                    The apparatus used employed  three-electrode  potentlostatlc  control circuitry with
                    interruptable linear voltage sweep  control.  All  solutions  were 0.5 mM  in  the
                    electroactiv* species with dimethyl sulfoxide aa  the solvent  and 0.1  M
                    tetraethylammonium bromide as the supporting electrolyte.   Nitrogen gas was  used for
                    deaeratlon.  The voltage  values for the compounds analyzed  are tabulated.

                    INDEX TERJ6:  Pollutant identification, Polychlorlnated biphenyls, Chlorinated
                         hydrocarbon pesticides, Chemical analysis, Pollutants, Fingerprinting,
                         Polychlorittated naphthalenes, Voltamnetry, Voltanmetric detector,  Polychlorlnated
                         benzenes, Characterization, Chlorinated hydrocarbons,  laomers, Reduction
                         potentials.
AMIC-9293
"A M3DIFIED EXTRACTION kCTHOD FOR DETERMINATION OF MINERAL OIL IN SEA WATER",
Hughea, D. R., Belcher, R. S., O'Brien, E. J.,  Bulletin of Environmental Contamination
and Toxicology. Vol. 10, No. 3, September 1973, pp 170-171.

         Synthetic seawater samples for evolution of three oil-extraction procedures
were prepared by adding sodium chloride to distilled water and spiking with 3-8 to 188
ppm Bass Strait Crude Oil.  The three extraction techniques were (I) reciprocal
shaking with carbon tetrachlorlde, (2) stirring with a stainless steel impeller with
carbon tetrachlorlde, and (3) same procedure as (2) in an ultrasonic cleaning bath.
Extractions were for 15 minutes, after which samples were allowed to stand overnight.
Further separation was carried out in a separatory funnel.  The third procedure required
centrlfuglng to separate phases.  Extracts were added to a Florlsll column, eluted wltn
carbon tetrachloride, and the sunned infrared absorption determined for tfte eluate.
Recoveries which were determined from calibration curves vere  best (mean iralue 102
percent) using the stirring-ultrasonic dispersion method.

INDEX TERMS:  Water aralysls, Sea water,  Separation techniques,  Oil, Recovery,
      Infrared absorption.

-------
                                                                         1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMJC-9266
 "THE DETERMINATION OF METHYL MERCURY IN URINE",  Ross,  F.  T., Gonzalez, J.  G.,
 Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology,  Vol. 10, No. 3, September
 1973, pjTT87-1927

          Described is a modification of the above procedure for the determination of
 methyl mercury in urine employing a cystelne acetate cleanup procedure and analysis
 using the GLC-£C technique.  A urine sample is pipetted into a stoppered centrifuge tube
 and acidified to pH 1 with concentrated HC1.  Benzene  is  added to the mixture  and
 shaken vigorously for 5 mln.   The emulsion was broken  by  centrifugation, and the organic
 layer removed by a disposable pipette.   The urine is extracted again as described
 above.  The organic layers were combined,  and an aliquot  was removed and extracted with
 cystelne acetate solution.  The mixture was shaken vigorously,  the layers  separated,  and
 an aliquot acidified to pH 1 with HC1 and  extracted  with  tvo portions of benzene.   The
 benzene layers were combined, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and stored in a  glass
 stoppered test tube until GLC analysis. This method is capable of detecting ppb of MMC
 and combines high recoveries and rapid  analysis  time in a single procedure.  Since
 binding of HC to urine constituents is fast and complete,  acidification of the urine
 to pH 1-2 is absolutely necessary prior to benzene extraction.   The cleanup procedure
 using cysteine acetate solution is also essential for  the elimination of interfering
 GLC peaks.

 INDEX TEHMS:  Urine,  Methodology,  Pollutant identification,  Chemical analysis,
       Electron capture gas chromatography,  Methylmercury,  Sample preparation, Cleanup,
       Chemical recovery.
AHIC-928T
 "TTTRATION  OF SULPHATE  IN MINERAL WATERS AND SEA WATER BY US IDG THE SOLID-STATE
LEAD ELECTRODE", Mascini, M., Analyst. Vol. 98, No. 1166, May 1973, pp 325-328.

         A  procedure Is described for the determination of sulfate in the range 20 to
3000 p.p.m. in mineral  and seawaters by using a lead-selective electrode.  Chloride and
hydrogen carbonate are  separated from the sample by passing it firstly through a
cation-exchange resin in the silver form, and secondly through a cation-exchange resin
In the acid form.  The  solution recovered is titrated with standard lead nitrate
solution.   Phosphates,  occasionally present In mineral waters, interfere with the
sulfate determination.  Based on several titrations carried out on standard solutions
of sulfate and on seawater and mineral waters, the extent of error shows that the
procedure is acceptable for routine analysis.  The limit of sensitivity is about 10 ppm
and the titratlon time  is about 10 minutes.

INDEX TERMS:  Mineral water, Sea water, Sulfates, Chemical analysis. Pollutant
      identification, Separation techniques, Lead electrodes,  Potentiometrlc titratlon,
      Sample preparation,  Chemical recovery, Sensitivity,  Chemical Interference,
      Precision.
 AMIC-9268
 "ANAIXSIS OF HIGH-PURITY WATER BY FLMELESS ATOMIC -ABSORPTION SPECTRQSCOPY.  PART II.
 SIGNAL INTEGRATION WITH A NON-RESOKAMCE LINE CORRECTION SYSTEM FOR SPURIOUS
 ABSORPTION PHENOMENA", Plcfcford, C. J., Rossi, G., Analyst. Vol. 98, No. 1166, May
 1973, PP 329-331*.

          A polychromator has been used In conjunction with a multi-channel integration
 system and an automatic sample injection unit in graphite-tube flameless
 atomic-absorption spectroscopy.   The precision of the system has been evaluated at high
 and low absorbances,  and Its ability to compensate for spurious absorption and variable
 volatility effects examined.  The use of a non-resonance line correction system and
 integration of the absorption signal improves the precision of graphite-tube flameless
 atomic-absorption speetroscopy,  particularly at low concentration levels.  Some
 variations in signal  intensity caused by changes in the volatility of the sample can
 be eliminated,  and the compensation for spurious absorption phenomena Is satisfactory
 up to 95  percent absorption, provided that the reference line is close to the resonance
 line of the main element.   With  the automatic sampler the system does represent e first
 approach to a fully automatic scheme for multi-element determinations by flameless
 atomic-absorption spectroacopy.   The results achieved indicate the feasibility and the
 applicability of such a system,  particularly when a limited number of elements have to
 be determined on a routine basis or when the limited size and the nature of the sample
 (toxieity and activity) could make cumbersome or impossible the determination of more
 elements.

 INDEX TERMS:  Chemical analysis,  Heavy metals,  Automatic control.  High purity water,
       Flameless atonic absorption spectrophotometry,  Multielemental  analysis,
       Graphite  tube.
AMIC-9292
 "GAS-LIQUID CHBOMATCGRAPHIC DETERMINATION OF CHLORFENVINPHOS IN MILK, EGGS, AND
BODY TISSUES OF CATTLE AND CHICKENS", Ivey, M. C., Oehler, D. D., Claborn, V.  H.,
Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry, Vol. 21, No. 5, September/October  1973,
pp 822-^21*.
         A reliable and sensitive gas liquid chromatographic method Is described  In
which a flame photometric detector is used to determine micro amounts of
chlorfenvlnphos in the milk and body tissues of cattle and in the body tissues, eggs,
and manure of chickens.  With extraction and cleanup, 0.002 ppm of the insecticide
could be detected in milk and 0.001 ppm In body tissues and eggs.  Recoveries of
83-100 percent were obtained from the fat, muscle, kidney, liver, and heart of cattle
and from the fat, muscle, liver, skin, and manure of chickens.  Recoveries of 93
percent were obtained from milk and 81 percent was obtained from eggs.

IHDEX TERJC:  Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Organophosphorus pesticides. Milk,
      Poultry, Cattle, Pollutant identification, Pesticide residues, Flame photometric
      gas chromatography, Animal tissues, Chlorfenvinphos, Chemical recovery. Sample
      preparation,  Cleanup, Detection limits, Sensitivity.

-------
                                                                          1.   PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL METHODS
  AfflC-9293
  "PICLORAM PHOTOtmC DECOMPOSITION", Hosier, A. R., Guenzi, W. D., Journal of
  Agricultural and Food Chemistry, Vol. 21, No. 5, September/October 1973, PP 835-837.

           Irradiation of a 0.00208 M aqueous solution of the picloram sodium salt with
  300-380 nm ultraviolet light resulted in 99 percent degradation of the parent compound
  within 72 hr.  After 5, 15, 25, 31*, and U8 hr of irradiation, the amounts of picloram
  degradation were 15, 27, 31, 61, and 90 percent, respectively (all picloram solutions
  were analyzed as the methyl ester, solutions were methylated by dlazomethane).  After
  3U hr of irradiation, 11 visually observable degradation products, excluding the spot
  of origin (spot  no. 1) and parent compound (spot no. 13), were separated by tic.  Eight
  of these spots had radioactivity above background, which Indicated that the carboxyl
  carbon (C-lU) was still Intact.  No radioactivity was detected in the other three
  compounds,  spots 5, 6, and 8, indicating decarboxylation.  During photolysis, two
  chloride ions were produced per molecule of picloram photolyzed.  Evidence was obtained
  to suggest  that both a free radical and an ionic mechanism are Involved in the
 photolysis  of picloram.  The overall reaction proceeds by a nonchain mechanism.

 INDEX 1ERKE:  Aqueous solutions, Chemical analysis, Radioactivity techniques,  Pollutant
       identification,  Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,  Path of pollutants,  Fate of
       pollutants, Picloram,  Photodecomposition,  Quantitative analysis,  Electron
       capture gas chromatography,  Thin layer chromatography.  Degradation products,
       Degradation pathway.
 -rates and products of decomposition of 2,2-I)IBROMD-3-NITRILOPROPIONAMIDE", Exner,
 J.  H., Burk,  G.  A., Kyriacou,  D.,  Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry,  Vol.
 21, No.  5,  September /October 1973,  pp 838-W2.

          Rates and products of decomposition of 2,2-dibromo-3-nltriloproplonamlde
 (DBNPA),  an antimicrobial  compound for industrial water treatment,  were  determined over
 a range  of  conditions.  Rates  of hydrolytlc  decomposition,  determined polarographlcally
 at  various  pH's  and temperatures,  are consistent with acid- and base-catalyzed amide
 hydrolysis.   Hydrolysis of DBNPA ultimately  forms carbon dioxide,  ammonia, and bromide
 ions via  the  following sequence  of degradation  products!  dlbromoacetonitrlle,
 dlbromoacetamlde,  dibromoacetic  acid,  glyoxylic acid, and oxalic acid. DBKPA reacts
 rapidly with  various ions  such as bisulfite  to  form cyanoacetamlde.  Decomposition under
 the Influence of sunlight  also leads  to cyanoacetamlde.   Contact with soil and soil
 organisms degrades DBNPA.   Decomposition  of DBNPA by  several chemical and biological
pathways  ensures that the  compound  will not persist in  the  environment.

INDEX  TERM3:  Microblal degradation, Hydrolysis, Pesticide  kinetics, Environmental
       effects, Hydrogen ion concentration, Temperature, Chemical analysis, Pollutant
       identification, Soil contamination, Water pollution,  Degradation rates,
      Degradation products, Blocides, Nucleophlles, Photodeconposltlon, 2 2-Dlbrono-3-
      nltrlloproplonamlde,  Fate of pollutants.
 AMIC-9295
 "PERSISTENCE OF EMDOTHALL IN AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT AS DETERMINED BY GAS-LIQUID
 CHROWVTOGRAPHy", Slkka,  H. C.,  Rice, C.  P.,  Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry.
 Vol. 21,  No. 5, September/October 1973,  PP 8U2-&U6.

          A gas chromatographlc  method was used to determine the residues of endothall
 in both the water and hydrosoil of a farm pond and of laboratory aquaria.  The bulk of
 endothall added to the aquaria  remained  In the water during the course of the
 experiment.   Both in the pond and in the aquaria,  the herbicide persisted In the
 hydrosoil for a longer period than in the water.   In the pond treated with approximately
 2 ppm of  endothall,  the  herbicide could  not  be detected in the water and top 1 in.  of
 the hydrosoil 36 and UU  days after treatment,  respectively.   In the aquaria treated with
 2 and U ppm,  endothall was reduced to nondetectable levels in the water within 7 days
 after treatment.   It took 2 and k weeks  for  the herbicide in the hydrosoil to reach a
 level of  less than 0.1 ppm in the aquaria treated  with 2 and It ppm,  respectively.   The
 rate of endothall dissipation in the aquaria was similar at  both application rates.

 INDEX TERMS:   Persistence,  Pesticide kinetics.  Aquatic environment,  Pesticide residues,
       Radioactivity  techniques,  Herbicides,  Water  analysis,  Hydrosols  (soils),  Soil
       analysis, Aquaria,  Pollutant identification,  Endothall,  Gas  liquid chromatography,
       Fate of pollutants, Chemical recovery, Detection limits,  Sample  preparation,
       Farm ponds.
AMIC-9Z96
"PHOTOLYSIS OF PARATHION (0,0-DIETHYL-0-(li-HITROPHENYL)fflICPHOEPt{ATE).  NEW PRODUCTS",
Grunwell, J. R., Erickson, R. H., Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry, Vol. 21,
No. 5, September/October 1973, PP 929-931.

         Solutions of parathion and paraoxon were irradiated at 2537 A for varying
amounts of time and for 6 hr, respectively, in order to identify the photolytic
products.  Photoproducts were identified by gas liquid chromatographic retention time,
mass spectra, and infrared spectrum and by comparison with an authentic sample.
0,0,S-Trlethylthlopho8phate was identified as the major product of the photolysis of
parathion in aqueous THF or ethanol.  Minor products were 0,0,C-triethylthiophosphate,
paraoxon, and trlethylphosphate, which was formed by secondary photolysis of paraoxon.

INDEX TERMS:  Aqueous solutions. Pollutant identification, Phosphothioate pesticides,
      Degradation (decomposition).  Irradiation,  Photolysis,  Parathion, Degradation
      products,  Paraoxon.

-------
                                                                         V.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9299
 "CHARACTERIZATION OF WASTE EFFLUENTS FROM A  COWERCIAL PIMIENTO CANNIHD  OPERATION",
 Bough, W. A., Journal of Milk and Food Technology.  Vol.  36,  No. 7,  July  1973,
 PP 371-371*.
          Composite samples of liquid effluents  taken at each unit operation in
 plMlento processing every 30 min over a 2-hr period were passed through  a 20-mesh  screen
 to remove particulate material and analyzed  in  duplicate for the following
 characteristics:   total,  fixed, volatile, suspended,  dissolved, and settleable  solids;
 pH; total acidity; COD;  and 5-day BOD.   Flow rates  were  determined  with  a trapezoidal
 weir which was placed in the rectangular gutters carrying the effluents.
 Characterization  of the  unit effluents revealed significant  patterns of  difference in
 composition and flow rates.   The most concentrated  effluent  occurred in  the first stage
 of the processing operation where the roasted peel  was removed by washing.   The
 suspended solids  load of this effluent accounted for  69  percent of  the total suspended
 solids load and 37 percent of the COD load,  but only  18  percent of  the total flow.
 Segregation and separate  treatment of this concentrated  effluent is  suggested to reduce
 the total waste load.  Another concentrated  effluent  resulted from  the citric acid dip
 before the packing and closing area.  The flow  of the effluent was  only  10 percent of
 the total,  but accounted  for 32 percent of the  total dissolved solids and 37 percent of
 the total BOD.  Two effluents from the  grading  area accounted for 50 percent of the
 total  flow and only 10 percent of the total  COD load.  Recycling of  these dilute
 effluents to  the peel  removal operation is suggested.  Based  on the  rate of processing,
 the  total wastes produced  from pimiento canning contained 3.2,  60.2, and 35.4 Ib. of
 suspended solids,  COD, and BOD,  respectively, per ton of raw  pimientos.  The total waste
 flow was  U,81tO gal. per ton.
AMIC-9299 (Continued)
Card 2/2
IMDEX TEJ*6:  Effluents, Flow rates, Waste Identification, Industrial wastes, Food
      processing industry, Chemical analysis, Sampling, Pollutant Identification,
      Pimiento cannery, Characterization, Sample preparation.
                    AMIC-930U
                    "AHALYZIH3 HEAVY ENDS OF CRUDE",  Thompson,  C.  J.,  Dooley,  J.  E., Hirsch,  D.  E.,
                    Ward, C.  C.,  Hydrocarbon Processing,  Vol.  52,  No.  9,  September 1973,  PP 123-130.

                             A systematic procedure which utilizes isothermal  and molecular distillation,
                    chemical  treatment,  silica-alumina gel chromatography,  gel permeation cnronatography
                    and spectrometry has been developed by the  Bureau  of  Mines for the separation and
                    characterization of  heavy ends of petroleum.   Some aspects of the  procedure  are
                    described and applied to a 370-535 C  (700-1000 F)  distillate  from  Gach Saran,  Iran,
                    crude oil.  In  this  application chromatography is  utilized through anlon  and cation
                    exchange  resins to separate acids and bases, followed by chemical  treatment  with
                    FeC13 to  remove neutral nitrogen  compounds.  The distillate,  then  essentially free of
                    acids, bases  and neutral nitrogen compounds, is passed  through a dual silica-alumina
                    gel adsorption  column,  using gradient elution,  to  produce  four well-defined
                    concentrates; namely,  saturates,  monoaromatics, diaromatics and polyaromatic-polar
                    compounds.  Nfess spectra were used to identify the general composition of each
                    concentrate.  A combination of gel permeation,  mass spectrometric  and nuclear  magnetic
                    resonance data  were  then used to  further evaluate  the adsorption concentrates  of  the
                    distillate.  The entire procedure reported  in  this study is schematically outlined.

                    INDEX TERMS:  Chemical  analysis,  Methodology,  Separation techniques,  Pollutant
                         identification, Crude oil.  Heavy distillates, Oil characterization,  Gach Saran
                         crude oil,  Chemical composition,  Petroleum distillates.  Saturates,  Monoaromatlcs,
                         Diaromatics, Polyaromatic-polar compounds.
AMIC-9308
"THE FORMATION OF WATER-IN-OIL EMULSIONS SUBSEQUENT TO AN OIL SPILL", NfecKay, G. D. M.,
McLean, A. Y., Betancourt, 0, J., Johnson, B. D., Journal of the Institute of Petroleum,
Vol. 59, No. 568, July 1973, PP 164-172.

         A series of experiments were carried out to obtain more information on the
extremely stable water-in-oil emulsions formed when some hydrocarbon products are
spilled at sea.  It was established that the agent responsible for the stability was
not a discrete chemical entity but was an asphaltenic type substance.  The mechanism
resulting in the stabilizing effect does not involve electrical double layer interaction,
but Is due to the mechanical strength of the asphaltenic layer encapsulating each water
droplet.

INDEX TERMS:  Oil spills,  Chemical properties,  Oil-water interfaces,  Stability,  Emulsifie
      Emulslflers,  Chemical analysis,  Mass spectrometry,  Isolation,  Water-in-oil
      emulsions, Emulsification,  AsphalteneB, Crude oil.  Stabilizing agent, Gas  oil.
      Naphtha,  Asphalt.
                                                                                       10

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL_AND_CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9310
 "COMPLEX BEHAVIOUH OF COBALT IN THE DANUBE RIVER", Radosavljevic,  R., Tasovac, T.,
 Draskovic,  R.,  et al.,  Archlv fur Hydrobiologle, Suppl. W», No. 2, Muxh 1973,
 pp 2U1-2U8.

          As a part of a program for investigating the pollution of the Danube and
 studying the behaviour of different pollutants  introduced  in  the river, systematic
 investigations of the content of  Cobalt-6o and  inactive isotope have been carried, out
 and their concentrations in water, suspended material, bed sediments, plankton and
 other components determined.   The capture of cobalt by suspended particles and bed
 sediments has been studied.   The  behaviour of cobalt in the Danube River is complex and
 depends on many parameters.   The  interdependences between  the content of cobalt in water
 and dispersed components in the river, bicmaterials, macro-and-mlcrochemical elements
 indicate that blogeochemical transport in the river is very heterogenous and depends
 on hydrodynamical conditions.   The empirical curves of cumulative  frequency
 distributions of particular levels of cobalt in the cross-section  of the river at the
 kilometer llW* and 1137 have log-normal distributions and  confirm  that hydrodynamical
 conditions  in the river plays an  Important role in transport  of cobalt.  Results of
 field and laboratory experiments  are  presented.

 INDEX TERMS:  Cobalt,  Bottom sediments, Plankton, Suspended solids, Path of pollutants,
       Hydrobiology,  Aquatic  animals,  Water pollution, Chemical analysis, Danube River,
       Transport,  Chemical concentration, Bioaccumulatlon,  Animal tissues.
AMIC-9312
"A COMPARISON OF THE CONTENT OF MICROELEMENTS IN THE WATER OF THE RIVER DANUBE NEAR
VIENNA AND BELGRADE FOR 1961-1970", Frantz, Von A., Draskovic, R. J., Tasovac, T.,
et al., Archiv fur Hydrobioloeie. Suppl. W», Mo. 2, March 1973, PP 258-262.

         The Federal Institute of Hydrobiology and Waste Water Research in Vienna,
Austria, and the Boris Kidric Institute of Nuclear Sciences  in Belgrade, Yugoslavia,
started systematic investigations of the River Danube to determine the amount of
microelements by means of neutron activation analysis in dependence of place and time.
Results of 1961-1970 are presented.  (In German)

INDEX TERMS:  Water analysis, Chemical analysis, Neutron activation analysis, Pollutant
      identification, Heavy metals, Tims, Chromium, Iron, Cobalt, Sodium, Spatial
      distribution, Temporal distribution, Alkali metals, Danube River, Scandium,
      Antimony, Lanthanum, Rare earth elements.
 "INTERPRETATION OF INFRARED SPECTRA USING PATTERN RECOGNITION TECHNIQUES", Liddell,
R. W., Ill, Jurs, P. C., Applied Spectroacopy. Vol. 27, No. 5, September/October 1973,
PP 371-376.

         The pattern recognition technique utilizing adaptive binary pattern classifiers
has been applied to the interpretation of infrared spectra for carbonyls, cyclohexanes,
alcohols, ketones, esters, benzene, and ethers.  The binary pattern classifiers were
trained to determine the chemical classes of x-y digitized infrared spectra.  High
predictive abilities were obtained in classifying unknown spectra.  A new training
procedure for binary pattern classifiers was developed and used to classify Ir spectra
into chemical classes.  Pattern classifiers trained in the conventional way and by the
new procedure were used in conjunction with feature selection, and it is shown that a
small fraction of the data is necessary to classify these infrared spectra successfully
into chemical classes.

INDEX TERMS:  Computer programs, Data processing, Pollutant identification, Organic
      compounds, Infrared spectra, Pattern recognition, Carbonyls, Cyclohexanes,
      Ketones, Esters, Benzene, Ethers.
AMIC-93U6
"THE SPREADING OF HEAVY METALS IN FLOWING WATERS IN THE REGION OF OCCURRENCE OF
NATURAL DEPOSITS AND OF THE ZINC AND LEAD INDUSTRY", Pasternak, K.,  Acta Hydrobiologlca.
Cracow, Vol. 15, No. 2, 1973, PP l'»5-l66.

         Waters from channels, streams, and rivers in the area of lead and zinc mining
(Boleslaw) were analyzed for Cu, Zn, Pb, Cd, Mn, Cr, Co, Mo, Sr, and Ba to Investigate
the contribution of these industries to metal concentrations In the  water.  Samples were
collected in polyethylene bags and prepared for determination of microelements (except
Sr) by evaporating and dissolving the residue in nitric acid.   Determinations were made
by atomic absorption spectroscopy.  It was found that these industries contribute
significant amounts of Zn, Pb, and Cd to the receiving waters,  and these metals may be
transported considerable distances.  Lead content decreases the fastest and zinc content
the slowest as the distance from the pollution source increases.  The natural
occurrence of lead and zinc ores in the deeper rock layers does not  to any extent
Influence the surface waters with pH about 8.1 and with high total hardness.   The
Increase in the content of zinc, lead, and cadmium In the water of the Investigated
water courses is mainly connected with the industrial pollution.  The quantitative level
of these three heavy metals shows a distinct tendency to increase in the autumn-winter
season.  The occurrence of calcium-dolomite rocks in the catchment basin of the
investigated water courses is revealed in the chemism of the water by an exceptionally
high content of magnesium and a low content of manganese and copper.

IHDEX TERM3:  Distribution, Heavy metals, Mine wastes, Water pollution sources, Copper,
      Zinc,  Lead, Cadmium, Manganese, Chromium, Cobalt,  Molybdenum,  Strontium, Barium.

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
  AMIC-9350
  "ACCUMULATION OF FOSSIL C02 IN THE ATMOSPHERE AND THE SEA'
  Vol. 2U5, No. 5^19, Xeptember 7, 1973, pp 20-23.
Fairhall, A. W., Nature.
           A model showing the relationship between the accumulation of COS in the
  atmosphere from fossil fuels and the levels in the sea predicts that the rapid Increase
  in atmospheric COS will cause the sea to become undersaturated in CaC03.  The possible
  result of this undersaturation Is that coral reefs and shells of organisms would tend to
  dissolve.  The model is based on the premise that the long lived terrestrial biosphere
  and humus are not significant sinks for fossil COS emissions.   The author cautions  that
  the predictions of the model remain to be validated and the effect of undersaturation of
  CaC03 on calcareous organisms is not presently known.

  INDEX TERM3:   Mathematical models,  Carbon dioxide,  Water pollution effects,  Molluaks,
        Calcium carbonate,  Sea water,  Fossil fuels.
 AMIC-9352
 "PRINTOUT COLORIMETER FOR AUTOANALYSIS OF WATER POLLUTION", Snaddon, X. V. M. ,
 Mayo,  E. A., Cope, J., Process Biochemistry, Vol. 8, No. 9, September 1973,
 pp 15-17.

          A dual-beam colorimeter was developed to perform routine and continuous
 monitoring for the Upper Tame Mine Drainage Authority.  The criteria for the system
 were that it be reliable,  automatic correction of electronic drift be provided,
 discrimination between channels be provided with a means of detecting plateaus and
 peaks  and converting these maxima into concentration units, results be displayed In
 digital form,  and sample identification be included with results.  The system consists
 of four basic  sections:   the  input amplifiers,  linearizer,  and subtracter; the analog
 to digital converter and maximum memory system; the digital output stage;  and the
 power  supplies.   The optical  system is designed to withstand dropping without damage.
 Results of determinations  of  COD agreed closely with those  obtained by other methods.
 Use of the system to determine  anmonla-nltrogen and nitrite revealed that  temperature
variations and oxidation of reagents affected results.   Suggestions are given for
coupling alarms,  automatic  shutoff,  and data accumulation systems to the colorimeter.

INDEX  TERMS:  Colorlmetry, Water analysis,  Instrumentation,  Automatic control. Design
       criteria, Chemical oxygen demand, Ammonia, Nitrites.
AMC-9355
"SAMPLING TECHNIQUES IN CHROMATCCRAPHY", Karasek, F. W., Research /Development, vol. 2U,
No. 9, September 1973, PP 5M7.

         Methods and problems associated with sample introduction in gas
chrcmatography are discussed.  The most widely used method employs a syringe to inject
the sample through a septum.  Reproducibility is plus or minus 1 percent.  However,
problems such as septum leakage, sample blow-back in the syringe, and nonlinear
volatilization of sample may destroy the accuracy of results.  Valves have also been
developed for sample injection.  These can perform many thousands of sample injections
(versus 50-80 for a septum) and can be used for backflushing, column or sample
selection; detector switching, and concentration techniques.  Valves also are
frequently used In process chromatographs under automatic control and provide
reproducibility of better than plus or minus 1 percent.   Many of the procedures used
with GC are useful for liquid chromatography.

INDEX TERMS:  Gas chromatography, Sample injection,  Syringes.
                              AMIC-9359
                              "CHLORODIOXINS  IN  PESTICIDES,  SOILS, AND PLANTS", Helling, C. S., Isensee, A. R.,
                              Woolson, E. A., et al.,  Journal  of Environmental Quality, Vol. 2, No. 2, April/June
                              1973, PP 171-178.

                                      Chlorodioxins,  such as  2,  3,  7, 8-tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxln  (TCDD),  are
                              highly  toxic  impurities  found in certain pesticides.  A  review is made  of  (1) the
                              sources and toxicology of TCDD and  its relationship to the herbicide
                              2,l*,5-trichlorophenoxyacetlc acid (2,U,5-T), and (2) pesticide analyses and
                              soil-related  environmental studies  of  TCDD  conducted by  the U, £. Department of
                              Agriculture.  TCDD was persistent and  immobile  in soils.  The dioxin was not detected,
                              however, 6 years after abnormally high applications of 2,U,5-T to Lakeland sand.  TCDD
                              was not photodegraded on soil and only slightly, in aqueous suspension.  Plants grown
                              in soil containing 0.06  ppm TCDD had no detectable quantity (less than  or equal to
                              1 ppb)  at maturity.   It  was not  translocated when applied to leaves, but irashoff or
                              volatilization  occurred.   TCDD was undetected (less than 50 ppb) In 19  bald eagle
                              (Haliaeetus leucocephalus)  carcasses.

                              INDEX TERMS:  Soil contamination, Vegetation, 2 k 5-T, Pesticide kinetics, Toxiclty,
                                   Water pollution sources, Persistence, Volatility, Absorption, Translocation,
                                   Chlorodioxins,  Toxicology,  Pesticide  formulations, Impurities, Chlorodibenzo-p-
                                   dioxlns, Teratogenicity, Photodecomposition.
                                                                                       12

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9366
 "DISSIPATION AND PHYTOTOXICITY OF DICAMBA RESIDUES IS WATER", Self res, C.  J.,  Allen,  T.
 J., Leinweber, C. L., Pearson, K. H., Journal of Environmental Quality, Vol.  2,  No.  2,
 April/June 1973, PP 306-309.

          A study was conducted to evaluate (l) the influence of several environmental
 factors on dicamba dissipation from water, and (2) the biological significance of
 dlcamba residues In water relative to growth and development of several crop  species.
 Two south-central Texas ponds (only one was vegetated) were surface-sprayed with the
 dlmethylamine salt of dlcamba, and samples were taken and analyzed at 1, 3, 5, 7,  12,
 15 and 20 days after treatment and thereafter at about 7-day Intervals for an
 additional 70 days.   Dlcamba dissipation was studied under controlled greenhouse
 conditions using polyethylene containers under fluorescent lights.   Dicamba
 concentrations In field samples were estimated using mustard seedling bloassay,
 spectrophotometric,  and GLC  techniques.   Three greenhouse studies were conducted to
 evaluate seedling response of several crops to preemergence irrigation with water
 containing the herbicide.  The herbicide dissipated most rapidly fron water under
 non-sterile,  lighted conditions.   Pond sediment evidently contained mlcrobial
 populations capable  of decomposing the herbicide.   Temperature  was  crucial in dicamba
 dissipation,  especially in the presence of sediment.   Influence of sediment on
 dissipation rate of  dlcamba  was apparently augmented by  light in sane cases.  Under
 sunnier  conditions, dicamba at  U.U kg/ha per surface area of ponds dissipated at about
 1.3 ppm/day.   Dlcamba  dissipated as a logarithmic  function of concentration with time.
 Reaction of seedling crops to  irrigation water containing dicamba varied among species
 and cultivars.   Relative tolerance from these studies was ranked from most to least
 tolerant as follows:   sorghum  greater than cotton  greater than  cucumbers.
AMIC-9366 (Continued)
                                                                       Card 2/2
INDEX TEJ9C:  Pesticide kinetics. Pesticide toxicity, Phytotoxlclty, Water pollution
      effects, Pesticide residues, Environmental effects, Chlorinated hydrocarbon
      pesticides, Water analysis, Pollutant Identification, Water pollution sources,
      Laboratory tests, Resistance, Plant growth, Bioassay, Dicamba, Seedling crops,
      Dissipation, Fate of pollutants, Data interpretation.
 AMIC-9369
 "SEASOHAL CHANGES IK THE ORGANIC FORMS OF CARBON, NITROGEN AND PHOSPHORUS IN SEA
 WATER AT El IS THE ENGLISH CHABNEL DURING 1968", Banoub, M. W.,  Williams, p. J. leB.,
 Journal of the Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom, Vol. 53, No. 3,
 August 1973, PP 695-703.

          Water samples were collected at monthly Intervals during 1966 at Station El
 in the English Channel for analysis of organic C,  N,  and P to determine seasonal
 variations.   Two aliquots from each sample were filtered for particulate N and C
 analysis through two glass fiber filters,  one for analysis of organic C and one for
 or^nic N.   The filtrate was frozen Ln clean bottles  until analysis.   The filters were
 washed with  K2SO1* and H2SOU to remove inorganic carbonates and stored in solid C02.
 Particulate  organic C was measured by infrared analysis  of C02 formed by combustion.
 Particulate  N was measured by KJeldahl combustion followed by colorimetrlc determination
 of ammonia by conversion to indophenol blue.   Dissolved  organic C  was analyzed by the
 method of Menzel and Vaccaro (1964),  total S  and P were  determined by uv irradiation;
 and chlorophylls were determined according to the  recommendations  of  the SCOR/UVESCO
 report (1966).   The average integral mean  values were:   dissolved  organic carbon,  780
 micrograms C/l;  dissolved organic nitrogen, 6>k micrograms N/l; dissolved organic
 phosphorus,  3-8 micrograms N/l.   Dissolved organic carbon and the  particulate  organic
 carbon and nitrogen showed increases subsequent to the spring bloom;  such increases
 were less evident in the dissolved organic nitrogen results and not apparent In those
 of dissolved organic phosphorus.

 INDEX TEFMS:  Water analysis,  Seasonal,  Carbon,  Nitrogen,  Phosphorus,  English  Channel.
AMTC-9371
 "THE DISTRIBUTION OF TRACE METALS AND FAUNA IN THE FIRTH OF CLYDE IN RELATION TO THE
DISPOSAL OF SEWAGE SLUDGE", Halcrow, W., MacKay, D. W., Thornton, I., Journal of the
Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom, Vol. 53, No. 3, August 1973,
pp 721-739.
         Sediment, water, and fauna were collected from the Firth of Clyde during
September, 1971 to January, 1972 for analysis of heavy metals resulting from disposal of
sewage sludge.  Procedures for sample preparation are given.  Ca, Cd, Cr, Cu, Fe, Mn,
HI, Pb, and Zn in sediments was determined by atomic absorption.  Ag was determined by
optical emission spectroscopy, and As, Mo, Sn, and V by colorimetry.  Fiuna were
homogenized, and water was solvent extracted and preconcentrated for AA analysis.  Only
liver and muscle were analyzed from fish.  Mercury in sediments was determined by
cold-vapor AA after drying and acid digestion.  Results show maximum ranges of Cu, Pb,
and Zn to be confined to a relatively small area within 2 km of the center of the
dumping area.  Hg shoved a similar pattern with peak concentrations of L820 ng/g at the
center of the dumping site.  Pb and Zn contents were also hlgn at sites further up the
Clyde; however, no evidence of large-scale transport was found.   Organic carbon contents
were 3-8 percent compared with background levels of 0.3-2.2 percent.  Epifaunal species
showed rather erratic variation In trace metal content, unrelated to total or readily
extractable trace metals in the underlying sediment.   The trace-metal content of
demersal fish species was not significantly different from figures reported for
elsewhere in the United Kingdom.   The distributions of sane In-faunal and epifaunal
species in the area are described.   It is concluded that the effects of sewage sludge
disposal in this area are local,  gross changes being limited to  an area of about 20 sq
km of sea-bed.  However,  little is known of the overall effects  of toxic wastes
particularly at threshold levels,  and further monitoring Is  required.
                                                                                       13

-------
                                                                         1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9371 (Continued)
Card 2/2
 INDEX TERMS:  Water analysis, Heavy metals,  Sediments,  Sludge disposal, Benthlc  fauna,
       Marine fish,  Calcium,  Cadmium, Chromium,  Copper,  Iron,  Manganese, Nickel,  Lead,
       Zinc, Mercury, Carbon, Atomic absorption  spectrophotometry,  Sample  preparation,
       Silver.
AMIC-9372
 "AN  IMPROVED BOTTOMJiATER SAMPLER",  Joyce,  J.  R., Journal  of the Marine Biological
Association  of the  United Kingdom. Vol.  53, Ho.  3, August  1973,  PP VH-T&.
AMIC-9379
"IROH, ZIBC, MAGNESIUM, AND COPPER CONCENTRATIONS IN BODY MEAT OF THE BLUE CRAB,
CALLJNECTES SAPIDUS", Boon, D. D., Chesapeake Science, Vol. lU, No.  2, June 1973,
pp 1U3-1W*.

         Body meat of the blue crab, Callinectea sapldus, was analyzed by atomic
absorption for iron, zinc, magnesium, and copper.  Samples were taken biweekly from
May 6, 1971 to April 19, 1972, a total of twenty-six determinations over a one-year
period.  For each determination, a one pound can of unpasteurlzed 'regular1 or
'special' crab body meat was purchased locally.  One hundred grams of this meat were
honcgenized with 100 g of distilled water in a high speed blender and acid digested.
Concentrations found were as follows:  iron, 7-66 ppm; zinc, 36-68 ppm; magnesium,
39U-527 ppm; and copper, 5-97 ppra.  Concentrations of copper were high during May, 1971,
but no seasonal trend was found.  Iron and copper values were near those found by
other investigators in 1939; magnesium contents were hi^ier.

INDEX TERMS:  Copper, Iron, Zinc, Magnesium, Blue crab, Sample preparation. Atomic
      absorption spectrophotometry.
                                                                                          AMIC-939U
         A  sampler  for collecting water at predetermined points  above the
sediment-water  interface  consists of a frame  containing six inverted PVC bottles.  The
bottom of each  bottle  has a hole drilled in it  which  is fitted with  a single prespex
flap valve.  Sillco-rubber tubing is attached to  the  neck  of each bottle and passes
through a trigger bar  which is  connected to an  actuating weight  and  two support bars.
The tubes pass  through holes  in the  side plating  at different (interchangeable) levels
to collect  samples  at  predetermined  points above  the  sediment.   The  sampler can be
actuated at any depth.  This  device  has been  successfully  used in a  study of the Tawe
estuary, where  a bottom layer of high-turbidity,  low-salinity water  has been
discovered.

INDEX TERMS:  Sampling, Mechanical equipment, Water,  Design criteria,  Bottom water
      sampler.
                   "ANALYSIS OF ALKYL ETHOXYLftTES BY NMF",  Cross,  C.  K.,  NfecKay,  A
                   American Oil Chemists'  Society,  Vol.  50, No.  7,  July 1973,  PP  21+9-250.
                                                                 C.,  Journal of the
                            A new,  fast,  simple technique is presented,  which allows  complete
                   characterization of alkyl ethoxylates in terms  of  average  chain  length  of the alkyl
                   portion and degree of  polymerization.  The method  uses  trimethylsilylation  of the
                   termlnal-OH of alkyl ethoxylate to obtain a sharp  distinct internal  standard of  nine
                   hydrogens per molecule.   The number of hydrogens responsible  for the NVP it 0.7-1.5
                   and 3.0-3.9 ppm  can be calculated and,  consequently,  the average chain  length ind
                   average number of ethylene oxide units.   Water  and ethanol do not  Interfere since  they
                   are removed in the reaction.  Results for several  commercial  =ilkyl ethoxylates were in
                   good agreement with compositions stated by the  manufacturers.
                   INDEX TERMS:   Nuclear magnetic resonance,
                         Nonionlc surfactants.
                                          Alkyl ethoxylates,  Characterization,

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9UO3
 "A PNEUMATIC SAMPLE CHAHGER FOR GAMMA-RAY SPECTROSCOPY", Missoni, C. J., Fones, R. V.,
 Simon, F. O., Review of Scientific Instruments, Vol. kh, No. 9, September 1973,
 pp 1350-1352.

          The capacity of gamma-ray spectroscopy equipment was Increased by the addition
 of a gravity-fed, pneumatic-ejection sample changer.  The changer is designed for solid
 samples which are placed In polyethylene rabbits 1.65 cm In diam and 5.50 cm long.
 These are made by cutting off the hinge and opening tab from a 7.U ml polyethylene vial.
 Operation of the changer and the associated electronics are described.  The electronic
 circuitry has a fail-safe feature which stops the operation of the changer if a
 malfunction occurs.  The system has proved to be more than 99 percent reliable.

 INDEX TERMS:  Instrumentation, Automatic control, Gamma ray spectroscopy, Sample
       changers.
AMIC-9l<05
 "AHALYSIS BY  MEANS OF  GAS BUBBLE  ELECTRIFICATION",  Pantony, D.  A.,  Stagg, D. C.,
Zeltschrlft fur Analytlsehe  Chemle,  Vol.  26k,  No. 5, June  13, 1973, pp  3^8-353.
         A  simple  theory  is proposed to account  for  the reciprocal relationship
between concentration of  solute and the charge on a  droplet ejected as a  rising bubble
bursts  at a solution's surface.  Reasonable  agreement  Is found between theoretical
predictions of charge in  multlvalent electrolytes and  the  experimental values.
Application to continuous analysis  of flowing systems  and  to end-point detection  Is
demonstrated for acid-base and complexlmetrlc tltrations.

INDEX TERMS:  Chemical analysis, Solutes, Aqueous solutions,  Volumetric analysis,
      Electrolytes, Gas bubble electrification, Acid-base  titratlon, Compleximetrlc
      titratlon, Acetic acid, Nickel  chloride, Trlsodlum trlmetaphosphate, Trlsodlum
      orthophosphate, Tetrasodium pyrophosphate, Pentasodium trlphosphate, Tltrimetry.
 AMIC-91*06
 "AMPEROMETRIC TITRATIOH OF MERCURY(II) WITH EDTA, DTPA AMD TRIEN IB THE PPM-RANCE",
 van der Linden, V. E., Dicker, J., Zeltsehrlft fur Analytlsche Chemle. Vol. 26U, Ho.  5,
 June 13,  1973, PP 353-355.

          Hercury(II) can be titrated at pH 2.5-3 with EDTA, DTPA and TRIEN.  The
 titratlon la followed amperometrlcally making use of a rotating gold-electrode at a
 potential of plus 0.25 V vs. S.C.E.  Especially the use of DTPA allows the
 determination of small amounts of mercury(II) (down to 1 mlcrogram).  The standard
 deviation IB 2-3 percent.  A correction for the systematic negptive error of
 approximately k percent in the case of EDTA and 8 percent in the case of DTPA, mainly
 cauaed by the faradalc reaction at the electrode, can easily be made.  Bismuth, Iron
 and thorium will interfere, but on addition of fluoride the interference of thorium
 and iron  can be masked.  TRIEN showing a better selectivity of mercury towards iron has
 the lowest conditional stability constant and will not be suited to the titration of
 very low  concentrations.  Copper may be present in a thousand fold concentration.
 About equivalent amounts of iron(lll) can be titrated in one run with mercury.  In that
 case two  end-points are obtained, the first one for iron, the second one for mercury.
 The ratio of the conditional constants of mercury to those for copper and iron is more
 favourable for DTPA and especially TKEEN.

 IHDEX TERMS;  Volumetric analysts, Mercury, Electrochemistry,  Amperometric titratlon,
      EDTA, DTPA, TRIES, Metal complexes, Trace levels,  Rotating gold electrodes,
      Chemical interference, Precision, Stability constants.
AMIC-oli07
"SELECTION OP EXPERIMENTAL CONDITIOHS FOR THE PHOTOMETRIC COMPLEX FORMATION
TITRATIOHS OF METALS IN THE PPM.RANGE", Kragten, J., Zettsehrlft fur Analytische Chemie,
Vol. 26U, No. 5, June 13, 1973, pp 356-361.

         Metals can be complexometrlcaUy titrated In the ppm-range in the presence of
e
-------
                                                                         1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 "APPLICATION OF ACTIVATED CARBON FOR THE ENRICHMENT OF TRACE ELEMENTS AND THEIR
 DETERMINATION BY ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROMSTRY", Jackwerth, E., Lohmar, J.,
 Wittier, G., Zeitschrift fur Analytlsche Chemie, Vol.  266, No. 1, July 3, 1973,
 pp 1-8.

          Activated carbon can tie used as collector material in trace analysis.   Due to
 the special character of activated carbon, not only insoluble compounds can be
 enriched, but also many soluble chelate complexes of trace elements.  For that  purpose
 the buffered aqueous solution of the analytical sample containing complexing or
 precipitating reagents is filtered through a small filter paper covered with 50 rag of
 activated carbon.  The trace compounds, and in many cases also the surplus reagent are
 adsorbed by the collector.  By treating the carbon collector with acid after the process
 of trace enrichment, a trace concentrate free of unwanted substances ia obtained.   Thus
 it is possible to use sensitive electrochemical and optical methods for the determina-
 tion.   For the determination of the enriched elements  by atomic absorption spectrometry,
 the activated carbon suspended in diluted nitric acid  can be dispersed directly Into the
 atomizer.  The carbon particles do not cause any interferences.  The application and the
 advantages of activated carbon for enrichment of trace elements in high-purity  materials
 is demonstrated by some analytical examples.  (In German)

 INDEX  TERMS:  Trace elements.  Activated carbon,  Aqueous solutions, Chemical analysis,
       Heavy metals,  Separation techniques, Solubility,  Pollutant identification,
       Methodology,  Atomic absorption spectrophotometry,  Enrichment,  Sample preparation,
       Metal chelates.
 AMIC-91*13
 "ISOLATION AMD CLEANUP OF ORGAKOPHOSPHORUS INSECTICIDES AND THEIR OXONES FROM
 ANIMAL TISSUES", Hladka, A., Kovac, J., Zeltschrlft fur Anajytlsehe Chemle. Vol.
 265, No.  5, July 30, 1973, PP  339-3<*2.

         A simple Isolation and cleanup procedure has been developed for the
 determination of organophosphorus insecticides and their oxones in animal tissues.
 This procedure partly unites extraction of organophoephorus pesticides and their
 oxones with cleanup by column  chromatography.  Most polar coextracts remain on the
 column and In its further processing the eluate does not tend to form emulsion.  The
 process has been studied on model mixtures of P-32- and C-It-labelled pesticides with
 tissues as well aa after application of pesticides to white rats.  The average recovery
 of the method is 90.5 percent, with a standard deviation of plus or minus 5.1 percent.

 INDEX  TERMS:  Isolation, Pollutant identification, Radiochemical analysis,
       Phosphothioate pesticides, Pesticide residues, Solvent extractions, Oxones,
       Animal tissues, Radlochromatography, Isomers, Chemical recovery, Precision,
       Sample preparation, Metabolites.
AMIC-9U12
"SEPARATION AND GAS-CHROMATCCRAPHIC  DETERMINATION OF TRACES  OF FLUORIDE", Bock, R.,
Strecker, S., Zeltschrlft  fur Analytlsche Chemie, Vol.  266,  No. 2,  July  23,  1973,
pp  110-116.

          Traces of  fluoride can be separated  from aqueous  solution  by extraction with
(C2H5)3S1C1 in  m-xylene or with (c6H5)liSbOH in CH2C12.   Furthermore,  several
coprecipltation reactions  were  tested; absorption on hydroxyl apatite is most  suitable.
Determination of 0.05 ralcrogram fluoride/ml can be performed by gas chroma.togr8.phy of
(C2H5)3SiF in m-xylene using flame lonisation detectors; but variable blanks of 0.5-1.5
micrograms fluoride normally prevent the determination  of  less than ca.  3 inicrograms
fluoride.  (In German)

IBDEX TERMS;  Fluorides, Aqueous  solutions, Chemical analysis,  Separation techniques,
      Pollutant identification, Solvent extractions. Trace levels,  Flame ionlzatlon gas
      chromatography, Detection limits.
AMIC-9l*lU
"NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE RELAXATION TITRATION", Schluter, A.,  Weiss, A.,
Zeltschrift fur Analytisehe Chemie. Vol. 266,  No. 3, August 30,  1973,  pp 177-186.

         Quantitative determination of the concentration of paramagnetic ions in
aqueous solutions Is performed by NMR relaxation tltration.  By  measurement of the
nuclear spin-lattice relaxation time T sub 1 or the nuclear spin-spin relaxation time
T sub 2 redox titratlona and complexometrlc determinations of the concentration of
paramagnetic ions are possible.  Also the precipitation of ions  from the solution can
be followed by this method.  The use of a magnetic indicator In  this analytical method
Is shown.  The sensitivity of the method goes  down to concentrations as low as 0.001 M.
The accuracy of NMF relaxation titration is better than 1 percent.   A  number of
applications of the method are given.

INDEX TERMS:  Methodology, Aqueous solutions,  Chemical precipitation,  Chemical analysis,
      Chemical reactions, Quantitative analysis,  NMR relaxation  titration,  Paramagnetic
      ions, Metal complexes. Accuracy, Detection limits,  Chemical concentration.
                                                                                       16

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
  "OXYGEN UPTAKE OF BOTTOM SEDIMENTS STUDIED IN SITU AND IN THE LABORATORY", Edberg,
  If., Hofsten, B. V., Water Research. Vol.  7,  No.  9,  September 1973,  pp 1285-129^.

           Oxygen uptake by soft bottom sediments  was measured In situ with a
  temperature-compensated oxygen electrode  In a Plexiglas cylinder.   Comparative
  measurements were made In the laboratory  on sediments  cores  taken with a  modified
  Kajak bottom sampler from near the site of the in situ measurements.   Values obtained
  from In situ measurements at 19 localities in fresh and brackish waters vere in the
  range 0.3-3.0 g 02/sq m/d.  Laboratory measurements yielded  consistently  lower values
  and showed that the oxygen uptake depended on the oxygen concentration and that the
  temperature coefficient decreased with Increasing temperature.   There was no simple
  correlation between oxygen uptake and content organic  matter in sediments.

  INDEX TERMS:   Bottom sediments,  On-slte tests, Laboratory tests, Measurement,
        Freshwater,  Organic matter.  Brackish water, Water  temperature,  Running waters,
        Oxygen consumption,  Natural waters,  Oxygen electrodes, Concentration.
 AMIC-9l*37
 "ORGANIC DESORPTION FROM CARBON-II.  THE EFFECT OF SOLVENT IN THE DESORPTION OF
 PHENOL FROM WET CARBON", Pahl, R. H., toyhan, K. G., Bertram!, G. L., Water Research.
 Vol. 7, No. 9, September 1973, pp 1309-1322.

 e        The desorption of phenol from active carbon was studied using cyclic and
 continuous flow desorbers.  The absorptivity Index of phenol in each of 10 solvents was
 determined by spectrophotometry using a set of standard solutions of phenol in each
 solvent.   Phenol was adsorbed onto the carbon in a polyethylene container and the carbon
 was separated from solution by filtration.   The damp carbon was placed in flasks,
 frozen,  and vacuum-dried.   After 36-U8 h the flasks were removed, weighed,  and the "dry1
 carbon stored.   Final drying was done by freeze drying and confirmed by
 thermogravlmetric analysis.   A Soxhlet extraction apparatus was used to desorb phenol
 from carbon using methanol,  acetonitrlle and cyclohexane.  A continuous flow desorber
 constructed from a modified Soxhlet extractor was used so that «/n  the solvents could be
 used under identical flow  and temperature conditions.   The heat of solution of phenol in
methanol,  dodecyl alcohol, acetonitrile and cellosolve acetate was  determined using the
calorljoeter and  experimental procedure described by Betrand,  Beaty  and Burns (1968).   A
wide  difference  in desorption capabilities  was shown among the 10 solvents.   The system
employed was  complex, with water being present in addition to phenol on the carbon.   An
attempt to  correlate  the desorption  data with the physical properties of the phenol  and
solvent and regular solution theory  is made.   A  thermodynamlc approach using the linear
 Tree  energy-enthalpy  relationship produced  a  reasonable correlation of the  heat of
 formation of  the  phenol-solvent  hydrogen bond with the desorption data.   This indicated
 ihat  the desorption of the phenol from carbon in this  complex system is dependent upon
the ability of the solvent to form hydrogen bonds with the phenol.
      .   .                        __                                                  —
                                                                                            AMIC-9^37 (Continued)
                                                                       Card 2/2
 INDEX TERMS:   Phenols, Activated carbon, Methodology, Separation techniques, Aqueous
       solutions, Adsorption,  Solvent extractions. Moisture content, Pollutant
       identification, Desorption, Organic solvents, Pollutant removal, Wet carbon,
       Inorganic solvents, Heat  of solution.
AMIC-9U38
"ORGANIC DESORPTION FROM CARBON-III.  THE EFFECT OF SOLVENT IN THE DESORPTIOH OF
PHEHOL FROM DRY CARBON", Knictaneyer, W. W., Mayhan, K. G.,  Bertrand,  G.  L., Water
Research, Vol. 7, No. 9, September 1973, PP 1323-1330.

         The desorption of phenol from active carbon was studied using a continuous
flow desorber.  The system used was nearly water free to reduce water-phenol
interactions.  An attempt to correlate the desorption data  with the physical properties
of phenol and solvents, In addition to regular solution theory,  proved unsuccessful.   A
thermodynamic approach using the linear free energy-enthalpy relationship produced a
general trend by using the heat of solution for phenol in solution and a reasonable
correlation using the heat of formation of the phenol-solvent hydrogen bond with the
desorption data.

INDEX TERMS:   Activated carbon, Adsorption,  Methodology,  Phenols,  Separation techniques,
      Pollutant identification, Desorption,  Pollutant removal, Continuous flow  system,
      Dry carbon,  Heat of solution,  Heat of formation,  Heat  of wetting.

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
  AMIC -
  "TOE DETERMINATION OF PHENOLS IN AQUEOUS EFFLUENTS",  Cooper,  R.  L.,  Wheatstone,  K.  C.,
  Water Research. Vol. 7, No. 9, September 1973,  PP 1375-138**.

           A method Is described for the determination of monohydric and dihydric
  phenols in aqueous effluents.  The phenols were extracted into methyl isobutyl Icetone,
  the trimethylallyl ethers prepared, separated by gas-liquid chronatography and
  detected by a flame lonizatlon detector.  Complete separation of phenol,  cresols,
  xylenols, ethylphenols and dihydric phenols was achieved using dual  stainless  steel
  columns packed with Chromosorb W (AW-DCMS) coated with 5 percent trl-2,U-xylenyl
  phosphate and by linear temperature programming from 75  C to  125 C at 1.5 C/mln;
  concentrations down to 0.1 mg/1 of each phenol  in the original sample could be
  determined.  The results obtained by the gas chromatographie  method  were  compared with
  those using standard coloriawtric methods of analysis for carbonization effluents
  arising from different sources.   The method is  generally applicable  to wastes
  containing phenols.

  INDEX TERMS:  Phenols,  Effluents, Separation techniques,  Pollutant Identification,
        Industrial wastes,  Liquid wastes,  Chemical analysis. Drainage  water,  Flame
        ionization gas chromatography,  Cresol,  Xylenols, Dihydric  phenols,  Ethylphenols,
        Monohydric phenols,  Detection limits.
 AMIC-9UA6
 "PROCEDURES FOR RADIOCHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF NUCLEAR REACTOR AQUEOUS SOLUTIONS",
 Krieger, H. L., Gold, S., U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Radiochemlstry and
 Nuclear Engineering Research Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio, Report No. EPA-RU-73-01U-,
 *y 1973, IT1* PP.

          In the course of studies to evaluate potential health hazards from aqueous
 discharges at nuclear power stations during routine operations, the Radiochemlstry
 and Nuclear Engineering Research Laboratory of the U. S. Environmental Protection
 Agency's National Environmental Research Center In Cincinnati has compiled and
 tested the radlochemlcal methods given in this manual.  The composition of test
 solutions has ranged from mixtures of many radionuclides at microcurles per
 mllliliter concentrations to barely detectable levels at picocuries per liter
 concentrations.   The substrate quality has ranged from highly deionized colant water
 to waste solutions with high concentrations of salts and detergents.  The procedures in
 the front section of the manual are standard methods (ASTM Standards) which are
 applicable  for separating and measuring these radionuclides In most reactor liquid
 wastes.   The methods  in the  second section have been compiled from information in
 analytical  chemistry  texts or from technical reports in the scientific literature.
 Method evaluation  Involved replicate analyses with reactor coolants, reactor wastes and
 specific  tracer solutions  as  substrates.   The criteria established for each method were
chemical  yellds greater  than  70  percent,  decontamination factors at least 1000,
 irocedure time commensurate with the half life of the nucllde being separated,  and
ease of analysis.
INDEX TERMS:  Radlochemlcal analysis, Aqueous solutions,  Nuclear reactors,  Analytical
      techniques. Radioactivity  techniques,  Liquid wastes.  Beta particle counting.
 "CHLORINATIOB EFFECTS ON ORGANIC COHSTITUENTS IN EFFLUENTS FROM DOMESTIC SABITABY
 SEWAGE TREATMENT PLMTTS", Jolley, B. L., Oak Ridge National Laboratory, Oak Ridge,
 Tennessee, Report No. ORNL-TM-1^90, Contract No. W-7li05-eng-a6, October 1973,
 3^ PP.

         The major objectives  of this research were to develop a method for examining
 chlorination effects and to determine whether, as well as to what extent,
 chlorine-containing organic compounds are formed when effluents from domestic sanitary
 sewage treatment plants are chlorinated at mllligram-per-liter chlorine concentrations.
 An additional purpose was to characterize, or identify, and quantify stable
 chlorine-containing and other  organic compounds present In chlorinated and unchlorinated
 effluents.  Chlorination yields were approximately the same for both primary and
 secondary effluents.  Essentially the same effects were obtained by chlorination with
 either chlorine gas or hypochlorite solution.  The effects of chlorination in the
 chlorinated effluents were determined by a method which coupled chlorination by Cl-36
 radioactive tracer with separation by high-resolution anion-exchange chroraatography using
 sensitive radioactive tracer monitoring.  It was determined that chlorine-containing
 stable organic constituents are present after chlorination of effluents from domestic
 sanitary sewage treatment plants.  Over 50 chlorine-containing constituents were
 separated from chlorinated secondary effluents.   Seventeen of these chlorine-containing
 organic compounds were tentatively identified and quantified at the 0.5- to U.3-
 microgram/liter level.  In addition to the 17 chlorine-containing compounds that were
 identified, 32 stable organic constituents were identified and 23 of these were
 quantified at 2- to 190-microgram/liter levels in the effluents from domestic sanitary
AMIC-9iH*9 (Continued)
                                                                       Card 2/2
primary sewage treatment plants.  Nine stable organic constituents  were Identified,  and
eight of these were quantified at 5- to 90 microgram/liter levels in the effluents
from domestic sanitary secondary sewage treatment  plants.

INDEX TERMS:   Chlorination,  Organic compounds,  Radioactivity  techniques,  Sewage
      treatment,  Sewage effluents.  Domestic wastes, Chlorine, Methodology, Environmental
      effects, Sampling, Chemical reactions,  Anlon exchange.  Aqueous solutions,  Separa-
      tion techniques,  Laboratory tests, Laboratory equipment, Cation exchange,  Ion
      exchange chroma tography.  Chlorinated hydrocarbons, Synthetic  sewage.
                                                                                       18

-------
                                                                         1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9U52
 "EXPERIMENTAL STOUT OF TOE PHASE-SELECTIVE ANODIC STRIPPING ANALYSIS OF MICROMOLAR
 CADMIUM(II) AT THE MICROMETER HANGING MERCURY DROP ELECTRODE IN 0.1 M POTASSIUM
 CHLORIDE", Moorhead, E. D.. Davis, P. H., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, No. 13,
 November 1973, PP 2178-218U.

          Conflicting reports in the literature pertaining to the observed magnitude
 of the ac phase-selective current obtained in the anodic stripping of Cd from the HMDE
 prompted an experimental reassessment of the stripping behavior Of this metal using a
 micrometer-type HMDE and 0.1 M KC1 as base electrolyte.  Reproducibillty of the
 stripping analysis was indicated by a 1.20 percent average deviation in the measured
 peak height obtained for ten independent runs at the micromolar Cd(ll) level.  The
 functional dependence of peak height on signal frequency, applied ac voltage, and
 cadmium concentration conformed to theory developed previously for ac polsrography.
 However, observed in-phase peak currents obtained during the stripping step were
 substantially smaller than those reported by previous authors for the same experiment.
 The influence of stripping scan rate on the Cd-Cd(Hg) system was examined,  and peak
 heights were found to be strongly dependent On this parameter.  The importance of
 maintaining well-controlled conditions during pre-electrolysls was indicated from brief
 studies of peak height dependence on solution volume and stirring rate.  (Reprinted
 from Analytical Chemistry,  Vol. 1*5,  No.  13, November 1973,  pp 2178-2181*.  Copyright
 1973 by the American Chemical Society.  Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)

 INDEX TERMS:   Cadmium,  Chemical analysis, Electrochemistry, Aqueous solutions,
       Hanging mercury drop electrodes, Phase-selective anodic stripping, ac Phase-
       selective voltamnetry,  Chemical concentration, Trace levels,  Reproducibllity.
AMIC-9«*53
 "HIGH PRECISION SAMPLING FOR CHROMATOGRAPHIC SEPARATIONS",  Bowen, B. E.,  Cram,  S.  P.,
Leltner,  J.  E.,  Wade,  R. L., Analytical Chemistry,  Vol.  1*5, No.  13,  November 1973,
pp  2105-2191.

          The precision of several chronatographic sampling valves of original design is
shown to  approach 0.05 percent for unretalned solutes.   Hybrld-fluidlc, high pressure,
and commercial valves  have been characterized by measuring the precision  of their
column input profiles  and statistical moments.   A computer-based data acquisition  and
control system was developed for use with high precision algorithms.  (Reprinted from
Analytical Chemistry,  Vol.  1*5,  No.  13,  November 1973, PP 2185-2191.   Copyright  1973  by
the American Chemical  Society.   Reprinted by permission  of  the copyright  owner.)
INDEX TLRMS:  Separation  techniques,  Chromatography, Automatic control,  Computers,
      Hydraulic valves, High pressure valves,  Precision,  Chronatographic sampling
      valves, Hybrid-fluidic valves,  Data acquisition, Hamilton valves.
 AMIC-9U55
 "ENHANCEMENT OF THE SENSITIVITr AND SELECTIVITlf OF THE COULSON ELECTROLYTIC
 CONDUCTIVITY DETECTOR TO CHLORINATED HYDROCARBON PESTICIDES",  Dolan, J. «.,  Hall,  R.  C.,
 Analytical Chemistry,  Vol.  1*5,  No.  13,  November 1973,  pp 2198-220U.

          Factors which Influence the sensitivity and selectivity  of  the Coulson
 electrolytic conductivity detector  to chlorinated hydrocarbon  pesticides  were determined
 and optimized.   The most influential factors  which affect sensitivity  are absorptive
 surfaces,  electrode polarization, system stability,  and furnace temperature.
 Replacement of  the standard U-mrn i.d. quartz  reaction  tube with one  of 0.5-mm l.d.,
 replacement of  the silicone rubber  septum at  the furnace exit  with a teflon  fitting,
 and Increasing  the mAifimim  cell voltage to 1*1* V dc resulted in a  minimum  detectability
 of 0.1 ng for heptachlor and a  useable  sensitivity of  O.U ng as compared  to  2 ng and
 5  ng,  respectively,  for the unmodified  detector.   The  most Influential factors which
 affect selectivity are funace temperature,  reaction gas composition, and  reaction  gas
 flow rate.   Optimization of these parameters  enables most chlorinated  hydrocarbon
 pesticides to be selectively determined in the  presence of other  halogenated materials
 such as PCS with selectivities  greater  than 1000:1.  (Reprinted from Analytical
 Chemistry.  Vol.  1*5,  No.  13,  November 1973,  PP 2198-220U.   Copyright  1973  by  the
 American Chemical Society.   Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)

 INDEX  TERMS:  Chlorinated hydorcarbon pesticides,  Selectivity, Separation techniques,
       Gas  Chromatography, Polychlorinated biphenyls, Pollutant identification,
       Sensitivity, Electrolytic  conductivity  detector,  Detection  limits,  Gas  flow  rates,
       Furnace temperature, Chemical composition, Reaction gas.
AMIC-91*59
 "ADSORPTION CHARACTERISTICS OF SILVER, LEAD, CADMIUM, ZINC, AND NICKEL OH
BOHOSILICATE GLASS, POLYETHYLENE, AMD POLYPROPYLENE CONTAINER SURFACES", Struempler,
A. W., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. U5, No. 13, November 1973, PP 2251-225<*.

         Container absorption of low concentrations of Ag, Fb, Cd, Zn, and Ni ions In
aqueous solutions was studied using flameless atomic absorption spectrometry In order
to develop a workable method for studying trace quantities of these Ions in natural
precipitation (rain, snow, hail).  Only new containers (borosilicate glass,
polyethylene, polypropylene) were used after rigorous cleaning.  Fifty milliliters of
test solution were stored in each container during the aging period and analyzed
initially at dally Intervals.  After several days analyses were made at 2- to 3-day
Intervals, or longer.  The adsorption of Ag ion on borosilicate glass and polypropylene
containers was studied as related to light and temperature.  No single container type
proved satisfactory for all ions.  Polyethylene containers did not absorb cadmium or
zinc.   Acidification to pH 2 with HN03 prevented silver,  lead, cadmium,  and zinc
adsorption on borosilicate glass surfaces.  Acidification also prevented adsorption of
silver on polyethylene surfaces.  Additionally,  silver solutions must be maintained in
the dark, even under acidified conditions, to maintain stability and minimize
adsorption loss.   New polypropylene containers could not  be cleaned satisfactorily for
cadmium and zinc studies.  Extreme care was necessary to  minimize contamination when
working with the low ion concentrations detectable by flameless atomic absorption
spectrometry.
INDEX TERMS:  Adsorption, Aqueous solutions.  Heavy metals,  Ions,  Plastics,  Physical
      properties,  Borosilicate glass.  Polypropylene,  Storage containers.  Chemical loss.
                                                                                       19

-------
                                                                         1.   PHYSICAL  AND  CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9^70
 "HANGING MERCURY DHOP ELECTRODEPOSITION TECHNIQUE FOR CARBON FILAMENT FLAMELESS
 ATOMIC ABSORPTION ANALYSIS.   APPLICATION TO THE DETERMINATION OF COPPER IN SEA
 WATER", Falrless, C.,  Bard,  A.  J., Analytical Chemistry,  Vol.  1*5, No. 13,  November
 1973, PP 2299-2291.

          Controlled potential electrolysis at a hanging mercury drop electrode (HMDE)
 has been coupled with carbon filament atomic absorption as an analytical technique and
 applied to the determination of Cu in seawater.  Synthetic seawater and natural
 seawater samples were analyzed. Timed electrolyses  at a  controlled potential  of -0.35
 V vs. SCE were conducted with a simple three-electrode arrangement.   Deaeratlon of
 analysis solutions was accomplished ty bubbling N2 for 5  min prior to electrolysis and
 then by passing N2 over the  solution during electrolysis.   After electrolysis
 relaxation losses were examined.  Five microllters of p-xylene was used to pretreat the
 filament cavity.   The  mercury was  volatilized completely  by heating the filament at
 approximately **25 C,  then the Cu was atomized.   Accuracy  was checked by the atandard
 additions method. The natural  seawater analysis give 0.72 mlcrogram Cu/1  which is
 within the range for unpolluted seawater.   The practical  detection limit for this
 technique with this  electrode configuration,  solution volume,  and electrolysis  time is
 0.2 microgr-un Cu/1.  The absolute  detection limit of the  carbon filament atomizer is
 about 0.5 pg  of Cu (essentially the  same value  as the sensitivity per 1 percent
 absorption.   These results indicate  that this  is  a suitable technique for  the
 determination of  Cu  in unpolluted  seawater  vlth matrix  interferences  apparently
 eliminated and selective volatilization of  Hg without covolatilization of  Cu
 accomplished.   In addition,  in  this  technique,  sample size  is  limited only by the
 electrolysis  apparatus  configuration,  total amount of trace metal, and time, and  is not
 restricted to  the microllter  capacity  of the carbon filament.	
AMIC-91*70 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS:  Copper, Sea water. Chemical analysis, Methodology, Pollutant
      Identification, Trace elements, Electrochemistry, Hanging mercury drop electrode,
      Carbon filament, Flameless atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Controlled
      potential electrolysis, Detection limits, Accuracy.
                    AMIC-9l»72
                    "A MULTIPARAMETER OIL POLLUTION SOURCE ITEWTIFICATION SYSTEM", Miller, J. W.,
                    U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Edison Water Quality Research Laboratory,
                    Edison, New Jersey, Report No. EFA-B2-73-221, Contract No. 68-01-0059, July 1973,
                    181 pp.

                             The feasibility of oil pollution source identification is demonstrated on
                    eighty crude oils from the world's major oil fields.  Measurements of fifteen
                    diagnostic parameters were made on the 600 plus F fraction of the crude oil samples.
                    Of the fifteen parameters studied it was demonstrated that six were sufficient to
                    distinguish among the crude oils.  These parameters are carbon and sulfur isotoplc
                    composition, sulfur, nitrogen, vanadium and nickel contents.  A hydrocarbon gas
                    chromatographic profile was also diagnostic for identification but its usefulness was
                    reduced for aged samples by the effect of weathering.  The other parameters studied
                    were the saturate, aromatic and aspnaltic contents and the carbon Isotoplc composition
                    of each of these fractions, the n-paraffln distribution (odd-even predominance curves)
                    and the sulfur gas chromatographic profile.  The influence of weathering on the
                    parameters was studied.  A statistical procedure based on multivariate normal analysis
                    was developed to compare an unknown with a data library and to give an unbiased match
                    of the unknown with a known based on the precision of the measurement methods.

                    INDEX TERMS:  Oil pollution, Pollutant identification, Chemical analysis, Oil spills.
                          Water pollution sources, Statistical methods. Weathering,  Oil fields, Chemical
                          compositon, Crude oil, Oil characterization,  Oil fingerprinting, Data
                          interpretation,  Saturates, Asphaltics,  Aromatic hydrocarbons,  Gas chromatography,
                          Mass spectrometry,  Crude oil bottoms.
 AMIC-9l*76
 "INTERMEDIA ASPECTS OF AIR AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL",  Stone,  R.,  Smallwood,  H.,
 Ralph Stone and Company,  Incorporated,  Los Angeles,  California,  Report  No.
 EPA-600/5-73-003,  Contract No.  68-10-0729, August 1973,  365pp.

          Major air and water pollutant  control strategies are identified  which  are
 of current National concern. Emphasis  is  on artificial  transfer between  air or water.
 Natural transfers  are not treated in depth and land  is considered  only  as a  means for
 residue disposal.   Discussions  include  dangers of intermedia transfer from land to
 air or water.   Control methods  for each intermedia pollutant are discussed;  comparative
 costs and expected unit process efficiencies are  given.   Residue disposal methods and
 problems are presented.   Institutional  factors, regulations and  strategies for
 pollution control  are summarized  and discussed.   These are also  illustrated  with a
 gross regional study of the Los Angeles Metropolitan Area, which Is  described in
 perspective with the National scene.  Summary data are developed for major pollutants
 and residues discharged nationally and  in  the California  South Coast Region, along
 with product/pollutant ratios for industries represented  by the  Standard  Industrial
 Classification Code and other public  economic  sectors.  The framework for a
 mathematical model is developed for the prediction of the effects of change  in  any of
 the elements of the production-consumption-pollution-regulation  network.

 INDEX TERMS:   Methodology,  Air  pollution,  Pollution abatement,  Soil  contamination.
       Legal aspects.  Industrial wastes, Municipal  wastes. Water  pollution, Comparative
       costs, Model studies,  Waste disposal, Efficienceis, Water quality standards,
       Regulation,  Path of pollutants, Treatment facilities.  Treatment, Pollutant removal,
       Pollution sources, Regulatory strategy,  Air quality standards, Environmental
	impact.	_______^_	
                                                                                       20

-------
                                                                          1.   PHYSICAL  AND CHEMICAL  METHODS
 AMIC-9UT7
  "A. TOPOLCCICALLY  OPTIMUM RIVER SAMPLING PLAN FOR SOUTH CAROLINA", Sharp, W. E.,
 Clemson University, Water  Resources  Research Institute, Clemson, South  Carolina,
 Completion Report No.  36,  April  1973,  31  pp.  NTI£ Report No.  PB-222 278.

           A sequential  river sampling plan has been developed which  is Independent of
  the shape of a drainage basin.   Mathematical analysis indicates  this sampling plan
 will be the optimum one in the search  for a pollutant coming from a single source.  The
I procedure consists  of  sequential sampling at successive centroids of the river basin
|  such that only the  contaminated  portion  is followed after each step.  The site
I  selection for all possible source locations need only be performed  once using standard
' river basin naps.  This selection has  been performed for an river  basins In  South
 Carolina and the  results are summarized on a composite drainage  map of  the State.
 The map shows that  under ideal circumstances no more than 11 sequential samples vould
 be needed to locate a  unique pollution source on any of the  rivers  of South Carolina.
 Many practical problems require  that a simultaneous sampling plan be used and for this
 purpose the necessary  sampling sites can  be selected quickly from among the sites
 already narked on the  map  as sequential sites.  These sites  are  uniformly distributed
 and a 50 percent  sequential coverage of the state is possible  using a simultaneous plan
 for only 81 sites.  These  have been  listed in order of priority  and their locations are
 specified in terms  of  road numbers where  highway bridges are closest to each  site.

 INDEX TERMS:   Hater sampling, Methodology, South Carolina, River basins, Watersheds
        (basins), Sampling plans,  *Topology, Simultaneous sampling, Sequential  sampling.
 AMIC-9U78
  "LAKE MICHIGAN DISCHARGE STUDIES", Illinois Institute for Environmental Quality,
 Chicago,  Illinois, Final Report, June 1973, i^6 pp.  NTIS Report No. FB-321 869.

           To investigate the feasibility of zero discharge of industrial wastes Into
 Lake Michigan, effluents from eight of the 16 major dischargers were surveyed for the
 Illinois  Institute for Environmental Quality.  The companies surveyed were a
 pharmaceutical manufacturer, a coal-powered generating station, a flour mill and cereal
 plant, an outboard motor manufacturer, a smelter, two steel plants, and an oil piping
 company.  The surveys included characterization of effluents, analysis of treatment
 facilities and procedures, feasibility of waste recycling, and some recommendations for
 improvement of treatment procedures.  In terms of volume, the largest discharges to the
 lake were cooling waters.

  INDEX TERMS:   Industrial wastes, Electric power Industry, Food processing Industry,
        Domestic wastes,  Electric powerplant, Chemical wastes, Pharmaceutical plants,
        Flour mills,  Cereal plants, Steel mills, Piping companies, Smelters,
        Characterization.
 AMIC-9479
 "CURBEHT PRACTICE IB GC-MS ANALYSIS OF OH3ANICS  IN WATER", Webb, R.  0., Garrison,  A. W.f
 Keith,  L. H.,  et al.,  U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency,  Southeast Environmental
 Research Laboratory, Athena,  Georgia,  Report  No. EPA-R2-73-277, August 1973,  91 pp.

          Experiences during five years of evaluating  the application of gas
 chroma tography-mass  spectrometry (GC-MS)  to wastewater analysis at the Southeast
 Environmental  Research Laboratory have resulted  In the selection of  recommended
 practices for  such applications.   Liquid-liquid  extraction with solvents  such as
 methylene chloride and chloroform removed greater than 50 percent of compounds  found
 in pulp mill and petrochemical waste at concentrations of 2  micrograms/1  to 2O
 mlcrograms/1.  The KudernaJ)anish evaporator  was the  most effective  means of
 concentration  after  extraction.   Diazomethane and dimethyl sulfate proved to  be the
 most  effective of five methylation reagents studied.   Packed columns were effective for
 gas chromatography of simple  mixtures  and SCOT columns provided better overall
 performance for  complex mixtures.   Computerized data  reduction was essential  for
 practical use  of GC-MS for samples containing many compounds.  A computerized spectra
 matching program proved highly effective  in identifying  compounds contained in  the
 computer library.  The system was shown to be effective  in solving problems related to
 fishkills caused by  pesticides,  confirmation  of polychlorinated biphenyl  residues  in
 water and identification of compounds  discharged by over a dozen industries.  Over two
 hundred compounds were identified in industrial effluents.
 INDEX TERMS:   Pollutant identification, Chemical analysis, Waste water (pollution),
      Organic  compounds, Industrial wastes, Waste identification,  Solvent extractions,
      Organic  wastes,  Chemical wastes,  Separation techniques, Pulp wastes, Municipal
      wastes,  Toxlcity, GC-Mass  spectrometry, Sample preparation,  Eerivatization.
  AMIC-9
 "DISTRIBUTION OF MERCURY, CADMIUM, LEAD AND THALLIUM IN A. EUTHOI-HIC LAKE", Kbthis,
B. J., Kevern, N. R., Bradley University, Department of Biology, Peoria, Illinois,
Project Completion Report, Contract No. DI-1U-31-OOO1-3522, June 1973, 25 pp.
NTIS Report No. PB-221 993.
         Five species of fishes, two species of aquatic macrophytes, zooplankton,
migratory goose feces, water and sediments from a eutrophic lake were analyzed for
mercury, cadmium, lead and thallium.  Hg concentrations were determined by flameless
atomic absorption spectrophotonsetry after preparation according to the methods of
D'ltri et al. (1971).  Cd, Pb, and Tl concentrations in biota, sediments, and
waterfowl droppings were determined using flame atomic absorption spectrophotometry
after digestion with a mixture of nitric and perchloric acid.   Mercury was detected in
fishes and sediments only while cadmium and lead were detected in ill components.
Thallium was detected only in sediments.  Sediments in the lake act as a. 'sink' for
the four metals.  Mercury in axial musculature of largemouth bass was highly correlated
with length and weight.  A high degree of correlation between  other metals and weight
and length of other species was not evident.   The feces of migratory waterfowl had high
concentrations of both cadmium and lead.  In view of the large quantity of waterfowl
feces deposited within the drainage basin,  It is suggested that this avenue Is one of
the major sources of contamination for the two metals and that fallout from airborne
partlculate matter is secondary.  Fallout of airborne particuls-te matter nay be the
primary method by which mercury and thallium enter the lake although residual
concentrations of the four metals in soil of the drainage basin were not determined.

IMDEX TERMS:  Mercury, Water pollution sources, Cadmium, Lead, Chemical analysis,
      Pollutant Identification,  Ecological distribution, Aquatic life.  Thallium,
	Wlntergreen Lake.	
                                                                                        21

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
  "STABILITY AND REMOVAL OF COMMERCIAL DYES  FROM PROCESS WASTEWATER",  Porter,  J. J.,
  Pollution Engineering. Vol.  5,  No.  10,  October 1973,  pp  27-30.

           A study has teen made  of the more common basic,  acid,  and direct dyes used by
  the textile Industry In relation to their  stability to light  and water under conditions
  similar to those encountered when they  are discharged to  natural streams  and reservoirs.
  All the basic dyes (triphenylmethane, phenazine and thiazine  types)  studied  showed
  appreciable degradation during  their 200-hr exposure  to visible and  ultraviolet light.
  Of the acid dyes studied,  three showed  drastic  photolnduced degradation.   The acid azo
  dyes were more fugitive to light than the  acid  anthraquinone  dyes.   The basic reason
  for degradation of acid dyes seems  to be their  susceptibility to electrophilic attack.
  The data show that the direct dyes  are  more resistant to  photodegradatlon than are the
  acid and basic dyes and that they would be stable and resist  photochemical degration in
  a  treatment plant or  receiving  water.   The data also  show that  the rate of degradation
  for direct dyes is at least  10  times as slow in natural daylight as  in artifical light.
  Removal of dyes from  wastewater will depend on  dye class and  chemical  composition.
  Color removal  can be  accomplished by activated  carbon, a combined treatment of a
  chemical oxidant and  gamma radiation, and  lime  precipitation.

  INDEX  TERMS:   Stability, Environmental effects, Aquatic environment,  Waste water
        (pollution), Natural streams, Reservoirs, Industrial wastes. Physical properties,
       Light, Waste water treatment, Basic dyes, Acid dyes, Direct dyes,
       Photodecompositlon, Textile industry, Pollutant removal, Decolorization, Organic
       dyes, Degradation rates, Fate of pollutants. Degradation products, Chemical
       composition.
AMIC -9U92
"COMPARING THE QUALITY OF OUR WATERS", Hobbs, J. J., Medina
Pollution Engineering. Vol. 5, No. 10, October 1973, pp
                                                              0., Dillon,  A.,
          Many extensive studies are now being conducted throughout the world on the
quality  of water in rivers,  lakes and streams.   Analyses of grab samples collected from
  number of  major bodies of  water are presented in tabular form.  It is important to
note that grab sample results  are of value  only when related to a number of collection
factors.   The analysis  of these samples is  for  the purpose of general information only.

INDEX TERMS:  Water  quality, Water chemistry, Water properties.  Rivers,  Lakes,  Streams,
      Water analysis. Chemical analysis. Bays,  Springs,  Natural  waters.
                                                                                           AMIC-9509
                                                                                            'KETECTIOH AMD ESTIMATION OF ISOPROPYL METHYLPHOSPHONOFLUORIDATE AND 0-ETHYL
                                                                                           S-DIISOPHOPYLAMIHOETHYLMETHyLPHOSPHONOTHIOATE IN SEAWATEB IN PARTS-PER-TRILLION LEVEL"
                                                                                           Michel, H. O., Gordon, E. C., Epstein, J., Environmental Science and Technology. Vol.
                                                                                           7, No. 11, November 1973, pp 10U5-10U9.    ~                                **"

                                                                                                    A procedure is described for the estimation of two very potent
                                                                                           antichollnesterase chemicals, viz., isopropyl methylphosphonofluoridate (GB) and
                                                                                           0-ethyl S-dllsopropylaminoethyamethylphosphonothioate (VX) in seawater in concentrations
                                                                                           at the parts-per-trillion level by an enzymatic technique.  Kinetic constants for the
                                                                                           reaction of other anticholinesterases with two sources of cholinesterase and for the
                                                                                           reaction of the chollnesterases with several substrates are given.   With these data,
                                                                                           the reader can select conditions for the development of procedures  for estimating very
                                                                                           low concentrations of these anticholinesterases in water.

                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:   Estimating, Sea water, Pollutant identification,  Water analysis,  Poisons,
                                                                                                 Chemical reactions, Nerve gas, Trace levels,  Anticholinesterases,  Enzymatic
                                                                                                 techniques,  Enzymatic inhibitors.
 AMIC-9512
 'tCCURREHCE OF HEXACHLOROPHENE AND PENTACHLOROPHENOL IN SEWAGE AND WATER", Buhler,  D.  R.
 Rasmusson,  M.  E.,  Nakaue,  H.  S., Environmental Science  and Technology, Vol.  7, No.  10,
 October 1973,  PP 929-931*.

          Concentrations  of hexachlorophene  (KCP) ind pentachlorophenol (PCP)  in
 sewage and  water samples have been analyzed by gas chromatography.  Sewage influent or
 effluent or river  water  samples were acidified with  t* N H2SOU and extracted  three times
 with  chloroform.   The chloroform extracts were dried with anhydrous Na2EOli and
 evaporated  to  dryness in vacuo at  20 C to minimize any  losses of volatile components.
 The residues were  dissolved in CH2C12-methanol (5:1), ethereal dlazomethane added,
 and the mixtures allowed to stand  for 30 rain at room temperature.  After roethylation,
 the samples were evaporated to dryness in a stream of N2, redlssolved In benzene, dried
 with  Na2SOU, made  up to  5 ml  and analyzed.  HCP and  PCP levels in Sk-hr composite
 samples of  sewage  influent  collected simultaneously  from three Oregon cities ranged
 between 20-31 ppb and 1-5 ppb,  respectively.  Composite effluent  values from these
 same  sewage treatment plants were 6-12 ppb HCP and i-k ppb PCP, reflecting i 60-70
 percent removal of HCP and a U-28 percent removal of PCP.  Analyses of daily and hourly
 water samples from the Willamette River collected Just upstream from the  city of
 Corvallis, Oregon,  showed that HCP and PCP were present in river  water in concentrations
 varying between 0.01-0.1 ppb and 0.10-0.7O ppb, respectively.   Conventional processing
 of raw Willamette River water at the Corvallis Taylor water treatment  plant removed
 about 60 percent of the HCP and PCP originally present in the  water  leaving about Uo
percent of these chlorophenols in  the finished drinking  water.  Identifications of HCP
and PCP in sewage effluent  and influent,  Willamette River water and  treated drinking
water were confirmed by mass spectrometry.
                                                                                       22

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
  AMIC-9512 (Continued)
                                                                  Card 2/2
  INDEX TERMS:   Water analysis. Gas chromatography, Mass speetrometry, Pollutant
        identification,  Sewage, Chemical analysis, Phenolic pesticides. Chlorinated
        hydrocarbon pesticides, Water sampling, Hexachlorophene, Pentachlorophenol,
        Sample  preparation,  Chemical recovery, Pollutant removal.
 AMIC-9513
 "TOXAPHEHE ACCUMULATION IN FISH IN LAKES TREATED FOR ROUGH FISH CONTROL",
 R. A., Lee, G. F., Environmental Science and Technology. Vol. 7, No. 10,
 1973, PP 93^-939.
                                                                     Hughes,
                                                                    October
          The results are presented of a study which covered the decline of toxaphene in
 treated lakes; the extent of toxaphene residue uptake by stocked fishj and the toxicity
 of 'aged' toxaphene residues compared to that of the standard mixture.  Previously
 described methods for extracting, cleaning up and estlmtlng toxaphene residues In
 aquatic samples were used.  Electron capture &>.a ehromatography was used to identify the
 pesticide and its presence in samples was confirmed by thin-layer ehromatography.  Fish,
 stocked in lakes retaining in the water very small amounts of toxaphene and plankton,
 accumulated residual toxaphene while maintaining excellent growth and reproducing
 successfully.   Both stocked and hatched bluegills eliminated accumulated residues while
nalntaining excellent growth.   Edible flesh of bluegills contained leas than 10 percent
of  the whole body burden of toxaphene residues, and substantial portions of residues
were  removed by pan frying.   Significant correlations were noted between accumulated
toxaphene residue and fat content of stocked bluegills.   Toxaphene and toxaphene
residue accumulation were more closely related to fat content than to fish weight.
Bluegills  killed in lake treatment projects accumulated  concentrations of toxaphene
lower  than concentrations of toxaphene residues found in stocked bluegills.  Accumulated
toxaphene  in killed bluegills  correlated veil with fat content of the fish.  Baaed on
the changes  in  the  toxaphene signature in  gas ehromatography,  it is proposed that there
is a partial degradation of  some of the more toxic components of toxaphene.
IMDEX TERMS:  Pesticide  residues,  Pesticide toxicity,  Pesticide kinetics,  Pollutant
                      Water pollution effects,  Bloaccumulation,  Toxaphene,  Fate of
identification. Water pc
pollutants. Fat tissue.
 AMIC-9519
 "SALISITT CORRECTIONS FOR DISSOLVED OXYGEN MEASUREMENTS",  Pijanowski,  B. S.,
 Environmental Science and Technology,  Vol.  7,  No.  10,  October 1973,  pp 957-958.

          Presented Is a convenient method of compensating for the  effects  of  salinity
 on the data acquired from dissolved oxygen meters.   It is pointed  out  that the basic
 design of most of these instruments does  not include provision for salinity
 compensation or,  at best, uses a fixed value.   The need for a general  method  of
 compensation is emphasized,  particularly  when such meters  are to be  used In estuarlne
 studies.  The correction technique is  based on earlier work by Gilbert et  al. and is
 presented in a form suitable for development by computer for specific  instruments.
 Illustrations demonstrating the methodology include curves for a meter intended
 basically for use in freshwater as well as  for another which employs a fixed  value of
 salinity compensation.   The  correction factors are  dimensionless and can be applied to
 correct dissolved oxygen values in units  of either  ppm or  ml/1.

 INDEX TERMS:   Salinity,  Dissolved oxygen, Measurement,  Water temperature,  Methodology,
       Pollutant identification,  Compensation,  Correction factors.
AMIC-9528
 "MERCURY IN FISH, SEDIMENTS, AND WATER IN LAKE OAHE, COUTH DAKOTA", Walter, C.  M.,
June, F. C., Brown, H. G., Journal Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol. "*5,
No. 10, October 1973, pp 2203-2210.

         Analyses for total mercury content were made of fish,  sediment,  and water
samples collected In several locations in Lake Oahe, South Dakota,  and its tullwaters.
Preparation of fish samples for Kg analysis consisted of thawing frozen specimens,
removal of e. portion of the flesh, and rigorous chemical digestion.  The  concentration
of total Hg in the sample was determined by the Hatch and Ctt flameless atomic
absorption method using a Hg analyzer coupled to stripchart recorder.   A  total  of ''3
sediment samples was collected, placed in polyethylene bags and frozen.   Subsamples
were digested,  diluted to a 500-ml volume,  and analyzed for Hg  content as above.
Water samples were also analyzed as above.   Mercury concentrations  equal  to or
exceeding 0.5 mg/kg occurred in 30 of 225  fish samples tested (13 percent).   Higher
concentrations were found most frequently  in predatory game fishes,  primarily
northern pike and walleye,  from the cheyenne River arm.   Sediment simples with
mercury concentrations above 0.5 ng/kg were found  only In the Cheyenne River irm, but
water samples contained only neglibible amounts  of mercury.   Recommendations for
further studies are presented.

INDEX 1ERMS:  Mercury,  Freshwater fish,  Lake sediments, Water analysis, Pollutant
      identification,  Chemical analysis, Flameless  itomic  absorption spectrophotometry,
      lake Oahe,  Lake  Sharpe,  Sample preparation, Chemical recovery, Cheyenne River,
      Animal  tissues.

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
   AMI':-9538
   "SEASONAL VARIATIONS OF CADMIUM, COPPER, MANGANESE, LEAD, AND ZINC Hi WATER AND
   PHYTOPLANKTON IN MONTEREY BAY, CALIFORNIA", Knauer, G. A., Martin, J. H., Limnology
   and Oceanography. Vol. 18, No. k, July 1973, pp 597-6OU.

          Surface water and mixed phytoplankton samples, collected over 1 year in Monterey
   Bay,  California, were analyzed for Cd, Cu, Mn, Pb, and Zn.  Nearshore samples were
   collected about 16 km offshore over the Monterey Submarine Canyon.  Phytoplankton
 I  samples were  collected with a 0.5-m No. 20 net and concentrated on a ring of No. 20
 I  netting with  the excess water being removed by gentle vacuum.  Water samples were
 j  collected with a 30-1 PVC Niskin sampler; open ocean samples were processed aboard ship
   and stored in h N HH03 until laboratory analysis.  The metals were concentrated on a
   chelatlng resin (Chelex 100), eluted with U N HNO3, evaporated to dryness, combined with
   1 percent concentrated HNC3 solution, and analyzed by atomic absorption.  Aliquots of
   dried and ground phytoplankton were digested in HNO3 and H2O2.   After centrifugation,
   the solutions were diluted and analyzed as above.   The phytoplankton appeared to have
   little effect on the concentrations of these elements in water with the exception of Cd,
  which decreased during peak periods of productivity.   Generally,  metal levels in
  nearshore surface waters  appeared to be more dependent on hydrographlcal fluctuations
  than on biological factors.   Surface water collected on a transect between Hawaii and
  Monterey was analyzed for these same trace metals,  for Inshore-offshore comparisons.
  Levels of Cu,  Mn,  and Zn  were usually higher inshore than offshore especially during
  periods of strong upwelling.   Concentrations of Cd and Pb were  almost always  an order of
  magnitude  higher  inshore.
  INDEX  TERMS:   Cadmium, Copper,  Manganese,  Lead, Zinc,  Water analysis,  Phytoplankton,
        Pollutant identification, Seasonal variation, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
 AMIC-9550
 "AN AUTOMATED ANALYSIS FOR UREA  IN  SEAWATER", DeManche, J. M., Curl, H., Jr.,
 Cougnenover, D. D., Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, No. U,  July 1973, pp 686-689.

          An automated method adapted  to a Technlcon Auto Analyzer has been used to
 determine urea in seawater.  In  the flow system for automated analyses, a sample rate
 of 12/hr with a sampling time of U.5  min and a 0.5 min wash gave good results.  The
 sensitivity of the method with the  50-ram flow cell used was 0.018 absorbance units/
 (mlcrogram-atoms urea-N)/liter.   Ten  replicate samples of 1.0 and 3.0 mlcrogram-atoms
 urea-N/liter had standard deviations  of 0.019 and 0.017 and a lower limit of
 detection less than 0.1 mlcrogram-atoni.  For most precise measurements at low levels,
 the limit of detection is less than 0.05 microgram-atom urea-N/liter.  Beer's law was
 found to apply over the range of 0-10 mlcrogram-atoms urea-B/liter.  The method was
 used  to measure urea in seawater samples collected on cruise C72091 of the RV Cayuse to
 :he Inside  Passage of Southeast Alaska in October 1972.  The lowest value was 0.25
microgram-atom urea-N/liter and the highest 2.20.   The median value for 306 samples
 taken  at depths  from 1 to 200 m was 0.59.   The automated method  is rapid and sensitive
enough to measure  in situ urea concentrations before enrichment with N-labeled urea in
nitrogen uptake  experiments,  eliminating the problems reported by McCarthy (1972).

IHDEX  TERMS:  Ureas, Automatic  control,  Methodology,  Sea water, Pollutant identification.
      Water analysis,  Technicon AutoAnalyzer,  Sensitivity,  Detection limits,  Precsion.
 AMIC-9552
 'GRADIENT ANALYSIS  OF CARBON MONOXIDE AND METHANE ID POLLUTED AND OTHER NEARSHORE
 HABITATS", Welch, J.  T.,  Naval Postgraduate School, Monterey, California, Master's
 Thesis,  tfarch 1973, 8k pp.   NTIS  Report No. AD-76^ U82.

          A system for the determination of dissolved gases  in seawater by gas
 chromatography was  constructed and used to find the concentrations of methane and
 carbon monoxide  in  a  variety of habitats around the Monterey Peninsula.  Methane was
 shown to have a  maximum of  O.O0028 ml at 50 meters at the open ocean station, with a
 surface  value of 0.00011  m.   The  surface waters at the nearshore stations were almost
 three times this value.   Methane  was also shown to be an effective tracer for sewage
 effluent.  The carbon monoxide maximum was found at 15 meters which correlated closely
 with  primary  productivity.   The surface values were lower than the nearshore values.
 All stations  sampled  were found to be highly supersaturated with both gases.  This
 indicates that in this area,  the  ocean is a major source of both methane and carbon
 monoxide.  (Abstract  only)

 INDEX TERMS:  Water analysis,  Sea water.  Methane,  Water pollution,  Gas chromatography.
       Surface waters,  Water pollution sources,  Supersaturatlon,  Primary productivity,
       Tracking techniques, Tracers, Methodology,  Carbon monoxide, Gradient ai»lysis,
       Dissolved  gases, Monterey Bay,  Chemical concentration, Neirshore habitats.
AMIC-9560
"EVALUATION OF FLAME EMISSION DETERMINATION OF PHOSPHORUS IN WATER",  Seitz,  W. R.,
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Southeast Environmental Research Laboratory,
Athens, Georgia, Report No. EPA-660-2-73-007, August 1973,  18 pp.

         NUCOR's flame spectrometer for phosphorus analysis was evaluated.   Response to
phosphorus in the form of H3POU was linear from 3 micrograms/liter, the detection limit,
to 120 mg/liter, the highest concentration tested.   Metal ions depress  phosphorus
emission and must be removed by cation exchange prior to analysis.  High concentrations
(greater than or equal to 5 mg/liter) of sulfur interfere positively.   Volatile
phosphorus compounds produce a larger signal for a given phosphorus concentration than
nonvolatile compounds.  River water samples were spiked with Inorganic  and organic
phosphorus and analyzed.  The measured phosphorus concentrations were 10-25  percent
lower in river water than In deionized water.

INDEX TERMS:   Water analysis,  Phosphorus,  Detection limits,  Chemical interference,
      Flame emission spectroscopy,  Chemical recovery.
See also:  Category 2, AMIC-9167,  9323
           Category U, AMIC-9395,  9396
           Category 5, AMIC-92U7,  9576.

-------
                                                                                2.   BIOLOCICAL METHODS
 AMIC-7238
 "THE TRANSPORT OF ORGANIC CARBON TO ORGANISMS LIVING III THE DEEP OCEANS". Fournier,
 R. 0., Proceedings of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, Section B (Biology), Vol. 73,
 No. 18, 1971-1972, PP 203-211.

          Of the theories which have been proposed to explain the mechanism of organic
 carbon transport to Its point ot utilization in the deep ocean, none Is adequately
 quantified to demonstrate its validity.  A new mechanism is proposed based upon the
 occurrence of the so-called olive-green cells at various depths that suggests these
 cells may contribute up to 35 percent of the carbon requirements of the benthlc fauna in
 the deep ocean.  Quantitative data were obtained by collecting water with sterile or
 non-sterile samplers, filtering it through a membrane filter, and clearing and mounting
 the filter for microscopic examination.  The cells are pignented,  possibly procaryotic
 organisms of uncertain identity.  The cells were generally absent from the upper 50
 m, Increased in number from 50 m to a maximum at 30O-500 m., and gradually decreased
 down to UOO m.  The suggestion that these cells are the source of carbon for benthic
 organisms is based on three factors.  First, the distribution of these cells varies
 directly with the level of surface productivity.  Second,  the negative gradient of the
 cell concentration below 300-5OO m suggests that they are utilized throughout the
 water column.   Third, other studies have identified similar cells  In the guts of
 benthlc and pelagic organisms.

 INDEX TERMS:   Benthic fauna,  Distribution patterns,  Cycling nutrients,  Nutrient
       requirements,  Deep water.  Transport,  Organic carbon,  Olive-green cells, Marine
       environment.
 "A PBOCEDURE  FOR SHORT-TEJM BIOASEAY TESTS ON INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENTS OF LOW OXYGEH
CONTENT",  Ozburn,  G.,  Kraft,  J.,  Somppi,  L.,  Canadian Journal of Zoology, Vol.  51,
No. 7, July 1973,  PP 79^-795.

         In a newly developed bioassay procedure concerned with the toxicity of
Industrial effluents with a low dissolved oxygen content,  oxygenatlon van achieved using
a pressurized oxygen supply and polyethylene  bags.   This method greatly reduces the
 xasslbility of stripping volatile toxins  within  the  effluent.   The decrease  in  toxicity
 ;hat occurs If a sample is  aerated with a bubbler before testing can be clearly shown
 'ith this method.  The procedure  has  been used to determine the 96-hr LC oub 50 of a
 ileached kraft mill effluent for  rainbow  trout.

 NDEX TERMS:   Bioassay, Methodology,  Oxygenatlon, Industrial wastes.  Oxygen  sag, Toxins,
      Volatility, Effluents, Toxicity.
AfflC-9010
 "RESPIRATION RATES OF SOME HEW ZEALAND ECHTNODERMS (NOTE)", Johnson, W. S.,
New Zealand Journal of Marine  and Freshwater Research, Vol. 7, Nos. 1-2,
June 1975, PP  1*>5 -iW.                               "
         Respiratory  rates were measured in four  common New Zealand echlnoderms,
 Evechinua  chlorotieus and Goniocidaris umbraculum (Echinoidea), and Coscinasterias
 calamaria  and Pentajonaster  pulehelluB (Asteroldea).  The organisms, collected  from
 Otagp Harbour and Blueekin Bay, were maintained In running sea water until their
 guts were  cleared.  Single animals were  placed  in airtight containers filled with
 air-saturated seavater,  and  the oxygen tension  measured to the nearest 0.01 ppm at
 hourly  intervals  with a  polarographlc oxygen electrode.  All experiments were
 terminated when oxygen tension reached 50 percent saturation.  The respiratory  rates at
 12 C ranged  from  3.8  to  9.8  mlcroliters  02/h/g  (live weight).  The rates for
 Eveehlnua  and Coscinasterias fall well within the range of metabolic rates of other
 echinoids  and asteroids.  Goniocidaris and  Pentagpnaster have relatively low
 respiratory  rates.

 IHDEX 1EBME:  Respiration, Bioassay, EchinodermE,  Evechinus chlorotieus, Goniocidarla
      umbraculum, Coscinasterias calamaria,  Pentagonaster pulchellus. Ion selective
      electrodes.
AMIC-9167
"A LIMHOLQGICAL SURVEY OF THE FRESHWATER COASTAL LAKES OF EAST GIPPS1AHD, VICTORIA",
limns, B. V., Australian Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research, Vol. 2k,
No. 1, February 1973, PP 1-20.

         The limnology of eleven lakes in East Glppsland, Victoria, Australia, vras
examined in varying degrees of Intensity.  For the largest two, Lakes Elusive and
Barracoota, information is presented on physiography, major physical and chemical
features, microphytes, zooplantcton, littoral invertebrates, benthos, and fish.  Limited
data, mainly on water chemistry and zooplankton, are given for the remaining lakes.
The lakes are divisible into three groups.  The four floodplain lagoons contain
alkaline water dominated by sodium and bicarbonate ions.   Zooplankton in each consists
of Boeckell'' mlnuta, Thermocyclops hyallnus,  and Daphnla  lumholtzl, as well as a
variety of other entcmostracans.  The coastal dune lakes  have acid water dominated by
sodium and chloride Ions and a restricted zooplankton of  one to three species. Including
Calamoeeia taamanlca.  Compared with coastal  dune lakes of southern Queensland,  these
are heterogenous In node of origin, water chemistry,  and  zooplankton.   Despite some
similarities with dune lakes, Lake Barracoota is basically different.   Its  physiography
suggests a recent marine origin which is confirmed by the presence of two isopods and
a polychaete with marine affinities.

INDEX TERMS:  Water quality,  Aquatic  plants,  Zooplankton,  Benthic  fauna,  Freshwater fish,
      Ph- sicochemlcal properties,  Lakes,  Water temperature,  Dissolved oxygen,  Color,
      Dissolved solids,  Oxidation-reduction potential,  Sodium,  Potassium, Calcium,
      Magnesium,  Chlorides, Blcarbonatea,  Sulfates, Copepoda, Rotifers, Aquatic  Insects,
      Mollusks,  Crustaceans,  Mayflies,  Dlptera,  Isopods,  Australia,  Caddlsflles,  Odonata,
      Transparency,  Pelecypoda.	
                                                                                        25

-------
                                                                                2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-9175
 "SOME ASPECTS OF THE BIOLOGY OF CALLIOPHJS LAEVIUSCUUIS (KROYER) (CRUSTACEA
 AMPHIPODA) IN THE NORTHWESTERN ATLANTIC", Steele, D. H., Steele, V. J., Canadian
 Journal of Zoology. Vol. 51, No. 7, July 1973, PP 723-729.              	
          Callloplua laeviusculus. a small amphipod, was collected from several
 locations In the northwestern Atlantic, primarily in eastern Newfoundland, to study
 their biology.  The organisms were most comnonly found attached to algae on rocky
i shores with moderate wave exposure.  Populations peaked in late sunnier vhen the animals
j swarm at the surface and may then be found in the plankton far out to sea or on
I protected shores.  They appear to be confined to areas with positive mean monthly
 summer temperatures not exceeding about 22 C.  Fifty percent of the females were
 calculated to be mature at 5.6 and 6.7 mm in the summer and winter respectively in
 Newfoundland waters, but, in Labrador, maturity was not achieved in females up to 10
 mm in length.  In Newfoundland several generations are produced per year and the
 females may have more than one brood.   However,  the females are in the resting stage
 between August and November-December,  and young are only released from spring until
 late summer.   In Labrador,  where only  one generation is produced per year,  young
 are released in the spring but probably do not  reach maturity until the autumn.   In
 Newfoundland fecundity  does not vary seasonally.

 IBDEX TERMS:  Sexual maturity,  Life cycles, Aquatic  habitats, Calliopius  laevicusculus.
 AMIC-92U3
 "AQUATIC SEDIMENT AS A HABITAT OF EMERICELLOPSIE, WITH A DESCRIPTION OF AH
 UNDESCRIBED SPECIES OF CEPHALOSPQRtuX", fubaki. K., Hycologla. Vol. 65, No. k,
 July/August 1973, PP 938-9^1.

          During a survey of the marine, brackish-, and fresh-water fungi of Japan,
 three species of EmerlcellopBis were Isolated from the muds of four sites:  26 strains
 of E.  humlcola, 3 strains of E. m
-------
                                                                               2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMEC-9285
 "DDT INHIBITION OF ACTIVE CHLOROPHENOL RED TRANSPORT IN GOLDFISH (CARASSIUS AURATUS)
 RENAL TUBULES", Gruppuso, P. A., Kinter, L. B., Bulletinof Environmental Contamination
 and and Toxicology. Vol. 10, No. 3, September 1973, PP 181-186.

          Kidneys were excised from goldfish, placed In modified Forster's saline
 medium, teased with tweezers into loose masses of tubules, and about 0.5 mg placed In
 each depression of a multiple ceramic-ring slide.  After removal of adhering medium,
 about 0.1 ml of medium containing O.OOO02 M chlorophenol red was added.  DDT and Its
 metabolites, DDD, DDE, and DDA were added to Investigate their effect on epithelial
 cell transport of organic anions such as phenol red.  Incubation was carried out
 for up to 3 hours in a moist chamber at 18-20 C.  Every 15-30 minutes, depression
 slides were removed, the media drawn off and replenished, and the teased masses
 evaluated for dye uptake.  An arbitrary visual rating on a 1 to 5 color scale was
 made for the functioning tubules, the ratings for comparable depressions averaged,
 and dye-uptake curves generated using a least squares, curve-fitting computer program.
 To validate the method,  dose-response data were also obtained for two known competitive
 inhibitors, PAH (p-aminohippurate) and Diodrast (iodopyracet), and the metabolic
 uncouple!-, DHP (2, l*-dinitrophenol).   DDT and its non-polar metabolites, DDD and DDE,
 were clearly inhibitory at 0.0001 M.   The polar metabolite, DDA, appeared to be a more
 effective inhibitor than DDT.  The rapidity of the Inhibition Indicates that metabolic
 conversion of DDT Is not required for the inhibition.  Three mechanisms are proposed
 which may underly the toxlclty of DDT and like compounds.
 INDEX TErae:  Animal metabolism. Inhibition, DDT, Absorption, Bioassay, Goldfish, DDE,
       DDD,  Transport,  Chlorophenol red,  DDA.
 AMIC-9307
 "UPTAKE OF FLUORIDE BY WATER HYACIMTH,  EICHHORNIA CRASSIPES". Rao,  K.  V.,  Khandekar,
 A.  K.,  Valdyanadham, D., Indian Journal of Experimental Biology,  Vol.  11,  Ho.  1,
 January 1973,  PP 68-69.

          Water hyacinths (Elchhornla crassipes) which are known to act as  scavengers,
 were collected from the Hussaln Sagar tank in Hyderabad, India, and analyzed for
 fluoride and other trace elements (Ca,  Mg, Na, K, Mn, Fe, Co, Ml, Ti,  Cu,  Pb,  Zn,  P)
 TO EVALUATE  THE POTENTIAL USEFULNESS OF THIS PLANT FOR REMOVING FLUORIDES  FROM WATER.
 The fluoride concentration was 25 ppm In leaves and 60 ppm In petioles for a background
 concentration  of 1 PP* In the tank.  To further investigate water hyacinth as a
 fluoride scavenger,  plants were exposed up to 26 days to concentrations.^ 0,  5, 10,  15,
 20  and 25 ppm fluoride and analyzed for fluoride content.  Uptake ranged  from 11 to 75
ma'in the course of k weeks.  Since uptake was appreciable only at higher  concentrations
(greater than  10 ppm),  water hyacinth is unsuitable for defluorldation since levels in
natural waters  are generally below this level.

INBEX TERJC:  Fluorides,  Water hyacinth, Bloaoeay, BioaccumuOation, Biological
      Modification.
 AMIC-9309
 "FISHES AS  INDICATORS  OF WATER QUALITY AND THEIR SIGNIFICANCE FOR ECONOMIC USE",
 Jankovic, D., Archly fur Hydroblologie. Vol.  UH, No. S, March 1973, PP S22-228.

         Fishes react  differently to the Intensity and nature of pollution, which makes
 then useful as Indicators  of water quality.   Alburnus alburnua L., Chondrostoma nasus L.
 Scardinlua  erythrophthalaus L., Blica bjoerkna L., and others are rather tolerant of
 vastewaters of industry, mining and sewage from villages and agriculture.  The decrease
 of economically valuable fish species, Cyprlnus carplo carpio L., Acipenser ruthenus L.,
 Stlzostedlon lucloperca  L., and others, in the Danube and its tributaries depends on
 various factors, one of  then being the pollution caused by untreated effluents.  The
 knowledge of these adverse effects on the fauna of the Danube system makes possible an
 actual project for the development of fisheries.  (In German)

 INDEX TERMS:  Biolndicators, Water quality, Industrial wastes, Sewaae effluents, Mine
      wastes. Farm wastes, Freshwater fish.
AMIC-9311
"THE CHIRONOMIDS OF THE PERIPHYTON IN THE YUGOSLAV PART OF THE RIVER DANUBE",
Jankovic, M., Archly fur Hydroblologie. Vol. Ufc, No. 2, March 1973, pp 2U9-257.

         The report gives a preliminary account of the fauna of a stretch of the
Yugoslav part of the Danube, 50 km long.  The results were obtained at the beginning of
April 1971.  Twenty-one species of chlronomld lavae were recorded in the Danube between
Belgrade and Smederevo, 70 percent of them for the first time.  Eighty-one percent of
the species were of the subfamily Orthocladiinae.  Crlcotopus algarum, the
ccononest and most abundant species was the only one which occurred in all the
localities.  Leas freqvent but almost as abundant was Rheorthocladlum rubicundus.   Rh.
     :obius was also Important despite its relatively low abundance.  The subfamily
                                                two of them playing periodically a
                                                      More frequent was Polypedllum gr.
Chironcminae was represented only by 3 species,
more or less Important role in the periphyton fauna.
convlctum, which exhibited considerable production In the polluted part of the Danube
where another species of the genus, P.  gr. laetum, was the predominant species.   The
municipal and industrial wastevaters reduce the number of chlronomld species and cause
changes of their composition.  Thus species of Chlronominae were predominant in places
affected by the Iron smelter, whereas Orthocladilnae predominated in the part polluted
by municipal uutevaters as well as in the clean sector of the Danube.   (In German)

INDEX TEFMS:  Aquatic insects,  Water pollution effects, Perlphyton,  M14ges, Dominant
      organisms, Spaclatlon, Systematlcs,  Biological conunlties,  Secondary productivity,
      Ecological distribution,  Danube River,  Chironomlds,  Species abundance,  Yugoslavia.

-------
                                                                                2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-931U
  "OBSERVATIONS ON THE ECOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF  THE TURBELLARIAN FAUNA OF THE
  DANUBE DELTA", Mack-Fira,  V., Cirstea-Nastasescu, M., Archly  fur Hydroblologle.
  Vol. UU, No.  2, Mirch 1973,  PP 266-268.

           An account is given of the turbellarian  fauna  of the three main regions of the
  Danube Delta:  river,  river-marine and predeltalc.  Eurytoplc,  euryhaline and eurythermal
  species could be distinguished.   The Turbellaria  of the Danube Delta are, with fev
  exceptions, wide-spread in other Rumanian  inland  waters.   (In German)

  INDEX TEFMS:   Ecology,  Ecological distribution, Aquatic habitats,  Aquatic animals,
        Speciation, Systeraatics,  Turbellaria, Flatworms.
 AMIC-9316
 "OS THE SYSTEMATICS AND ECOLOGY OF THE GENUS CHAMAESIPHON  (CYANOPHYCEAE).  2. ECOLOGY",
 Kann, E., Archly fur Hydroblologie. Suppl. 1*1 (Algologlcal Studies 8), June 1973,
 pp 2U3-282.
          A compilation of the ecological factors governing the occurrence of the
 Chamaeslphon species investigated clearly reveals the  environmental requirements of the
 abundant species, those of less frequently occurring species are accordingly more
 obscure.  Chamaeslphon la a predominantly running water fora, although some species
 grow exclusively on inanimate surfaces (stones, glass, plastics), while others grow only
 on living substrates (algae, aquatic plants).  Few occur on both types.  In general,
 the species have a wide temperature tolerance; only a  feu  (Ch. geltlerl. Ch. fuscus.
 Ch  rostaflnskii) appear to prefer running water of constantly low temperatures (i.e.,
 also in sunnier;.  A similarly wide tolerance Is displayed  for toe chemical quality
 of the water.   With two exceptions, the Chamaeslphon species thrive equally well in
 calcium-rich water as  in calcium-poor water, although  some species are significantly
 more abundant  in the former.   It appears from previous Investigations that Ch. fuscus
 Is a Ca-pcor water form and that Ch.  geltleri prefers Ca-rich water.  Only a small
 amount ofdata  exists  on the role played by the trophic level of the water body.  The
 available data  indicate that Chama.eslphon species grow best in unpolluted water,
although some can tolerate polluted conditions.   Ch. polymorphua is the only species
which  has been  found growing In polysaprobic water.   (In German)

 INDEX  TEFMS:  Cyanophyta, Aquatic  algae,  Ecology,  Systematics  Environmental effects,
       Speciation, Dominant orguilsms,  Water quality, Aquatic habitats, Resistance,
      Ecological distribution,  Chamaeslphon,  Species abundance.
 AMIC-9317
 "BED LIGHT AMD NITBOGEN STARVATION IMDUCED CHANGES IN PIGMENT COMPOSITION
 (PHYCOERfTHRIN, CHLOROPHYLL FOHM5) AND PHOTOSYNTHETIC 02 EVOLUTION OF FORPHYRIDIUM SP.",
 Hoarau, J., Guerin-Dumartrait, P. E.j Leclerc, J.-C., Archlv fur Hydrobiologle, Vol.  39,
 No. 8, June 1973, PP 317-332.
                  dlum sp. Lewln^loom.  637,  was grown at 85OO  erga/sq en/a Intensity In
 red light (654 no) or In white light.   It has been verified that algae cultivated In
 this white light, giving a large proportion  of green and yellow radiations,  show the
 same pigment composition and photosynthetic  02 evolution as algae  cultivated In green
 light.   Inoculum was either synchronized cells or cells previously deprived in nitrogen
 (effects of light being studied during  the starvation removal).' Nitrogen starvation
 includes a rapid dropping of the phycoerythrin/chlorophyll  (Per/Chi)  quantitative ratio
 caused  by the fall of the Per content.   Photosynthetic activities  are reduced but
 remaining Per forms are still active for the energy transfer to Chi a.  Refeedlng gives
 a rapid Increase of pigment contents, specially for the Per.  When grown  in red light,
 after previous starvation or not,  Porphyrldlum cells show comparatively with white
 light cells a net lowering of the Chi content without important  changes in Per content
 (counter complementary chromatic adaptation).   Absorption spectra  of  algae measured  at
 -196 C  reveal three main forms of Chi a:   Ca670,  Ca677 and Ca683.   In red light,  the
 Ca683/Ca677 ratio Is decreased while the Ca670/Ca677 Is slightly Increased.   Measurements
 of photosynthetic O2 evolution indicate that in red light cells of low Chi content,
 efficiency of Chi for 66k nm radiations is Increased.   Efficiencies of Per and Chi for
 green (5^7 nm)  radiations are little affected.  (In French)

 INDEX TEW6t   Plant pigments,  Deficient elements, Light quality, Photosynthetic oxygen,
      Nitrogen, Rhodophyta,  Porphyrldlum.
AMIC-9318
"THE INFLUENCE OF EUTROPHIC LAKE SEDIMENTS ON THE GROWTH OF DIFFERENT PLANKTONIC ALGAE",
Javornlcky, P., Fujlta, D. K., Goldman, C. R., Archlv fur Hydrobiologie, Suppl. kl
(Algologlcal Studies 8), June 1973, PP 3M-362.
         In order to assess the effect of substances leached from sediments on the
production of phytoplankton In a large, shallow, eutrophic lake (Clear Lake, California),
one In situ experiment and four laboratory bioassays were conducted.  The field
experiment showed the effects of sediments on various species or groups of algae to
differs  the presence of sediment Inhibited the growth of Anabaena flos-aquae and
A. elrclnalls while It simulated the growth of Chlorococcales.In vitro bioassays were
conducted with seven "ip*1 strains, Aphanlzomenon flos-aquae, Mleroeyatls aeruglnoaa,
Oscillatoria Hmnetlca, Nltzsehla kuetzinglana, Navieula pellieulosa,  Chlorella
mlnutlsslma, and Scenedesmus intermedlus,  in 50-ml flasks containing sediment extract,
a synthetic imitation of sediment extract,  enriched (Ca,  Mg,  C03,  S103)  extract,  or
enriched Imitation.  Aphanizomenon and Chlorella grew well in the  sediment and synthetic
extracts for 200 hours which demonstrated  that the cells  were able to  store required
nutrients that were missing from the synthetic extract.   This test also  showed that
the chelating effect of EDTA and citric acid used in the  synthetic extract was
similar to that of the humlc substances in the sediment extract.   The  results  vlth the
enriched extracts led to the following conclusions:   (l)   Growth of Aphanizomenom is
definitely limited by Fe and probably by P.   (2)   Growth  of Microcystls  and
Oscillatoria Is definitely limited by N and possibly by P.  f5TGrowth  of Kitzschla
is definitely limited by N and probably by  P,  Fe  and SI.   (U)  Growth  of Navieula "is
definitely limited by N and possibly by P.   (5)   Growth of Chlorella is  definitely
limited by N and Fe.  (6)   Growth of Seenedesmus  la  definitely limited by  Fe,
probably by N and possibly by P.

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
                                                                                         T
  AMIC-9318 (Continued)
Card 8/2
  INDEX TERK3:   Nutrient requirements, Growth rates, Diatoms,  Lyanophyta, Chlorophyta,
        Bloassay,  Sediments,  On-slte  tests,  Phosphates,  Iron,  Nitrates,
AMIC-9321 (Continued)
Card 2/2
                   about intermediate In mean dry weight (1.8 gm/ sq m) as compared to other oligotrophic
                   lakes and was dominated by Chlronomldae.

                   INDEX TERMS:  Fhotoplankton, Primary productivity, Benthic fauns, Seasonal,
                         Zooplankton, Hater quality. Rotifers, Dinoflsgellates,  Pigments,  Crustaceans,
                         Diatoms, Cyanophyta, Chlorophyta,  Protozoa, Movich Lake.
 AMIC-9321
 "A LIMNOLOGY STUDY OF A HIGH MOUNTAIN LAKE IN MOUNT RAINIER NATIONAL PARK,
 WASHINGTON STATE; USA", Larson, G. L., Archiv fur Hydroblologle, Vol. 72, No. 1,
 June 1973, PP 10-U8.

          Mowich Lake, a high mountain lake in the Western Washington State Cascade
 Mountains, was studied from March to November 1967 to determine blotlc relationships.
 Alkalinity, pH,  oxygen, N, P, color, dissolved solids, temperature, transparency,
 conductance and primary production were determined.  Phytoplankton samples were
 collected, enumerated,  and extractable pigments determined.  Zooplankton were collected
 from 7 depths,  counted, and reproductive rates calculated,  Macrobenthos was sampled at
 5  depths.   In general,  the lake was low In mineral content and unproductive.  The
 winter lake cover appeared to play an important role in primary production by way of
 nutrient additions.   Primary production, extractable phytoplankton pigments and total
 Bhvtoplankton biomass were strongly correlated in both time and space, and were maximal
 in July   The maximum primary production was 152/sq m and 21/cu m mg C assimilated per
day.^ucimum phytoplanKton biomass was 32/sq m and 1.7/ cu m g» fresh weight.  The
activity quotient  ((mg  C asslmilated/sq m/day)/(mg phytoplankton blomass/ sq m))
indicated  the primary production of Mowich Lake to be in the oligotrophic range.  The
            community consisted of eight species of Rotifera.  The only crustacean,
          agills. was occasionally taken pelagically,  but was usually confined to
         andbinthlc  regions.   £oopla*kton populations were maximal between early
  tooeand mid-«ovember.   The  egg ratio reproductive  rate, B (eggs/female/day , was
        fro* September to early October.   Other population coefficients were also
                            Lonklsplna and Keratella hiemalls.  Tne macro-benthos was
                   AMIC-9322
                   "SOME ARCTIC  LIMNOLOGY AHD THE HIBERNATION OF  INVERTEBRATES AND SOME FISHES  IN
                   SUBZERO TEMPERATUKES", Holmquist, C., Archiv  fur Hydrobiologie, Vol. 72, No. 1,
                   June 1973, PP "»9-70.

                            Five shallow (less than 2 m depth) lakes in permafrost areas of northern
                   Alaska were investigated to determine whether bottom-living animals occur and survive in
                   frozen environments.   Samples  were collected in the summer of 1970.  A number of
                   macroscopic plants, algae,  and animals were identified.  The animals Included hydrozoa,
                   Turbellaria,  Hardigarda,  Gastrotrlcha, Polycnaeta, Oligochaeta, Hirudinea, Crustacea,
                   Insects,  Hydrachnida,  Molluscs, Bryozoa, Porifera, Nematoda, and fish.   The results of
                   the survey are discussed with  respect to the possible winter temperatures of the bottom
                   habitats  for  invertebrates  of  such areas, the frost resistance of invertebrates, the
                   oxygen supply, the mode of  hibernating in invertebrates, and the actual lakes with their
                   animals.  The available literature on low temperature survival of invertebrates  is also
                   reviewed.  Since the area concerned is compound and varied topographically,  geologically
                   and climatically, and  the invertebrates live in mierocllmntlc  and mlcroecologieal
                   conditions as compared with the larger, more mobile vertebrates,  it is  impossible to
                   deduce anything as regarding the winter conditions of the actual lakes  or the
                   frost-resistance of animals existing there from what is known  from the
                   better-investigated temperate areas or from laboratory conditions.

                   INDEX  lERfC:  Overwintering sites.  Cold resistance,  Aquatic  plants,  Oligochaetes,
                         Mollusks, Diatoms, Chlorophyta, Cyanophyta,  Survival,  Hydrozoans,  Turbellaria,
                         Tardlgrades, Gastrotrlcha, Polychaetes, Leeches,  Hydrachnids,  Bryozoa,  Porifera.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMICJ9323
   "STUDIES OH PHYTOPLANKTON IN RELATION TO ITS PRODUCTION AND SOW PHYSICAL-CHEMICAL
  FACTORS ID LAKE SVINSJOEN", Lande, A., Archly fur Hydroblologte. Vol. 72, No. 1,
  June 1973, PP 71-86.

           Llmnologlcal Investigations were carried out during 1968 and 1971 on Lake
  Svlnsjoen, a moderately eutrophlc lake about 30 km southwest of Oslo.  Investigations
  Included measurements of primary production, quantitative phytoplankton, pH, specific
  conductivity, Fe, Mn, orthophosphate, Ca, Mg, oxygen, alkalinity, Na, K, sulfate,
  chloride, and blcarbonates.  Primary production was determined by the dark bottle
  method and by C-lU uptake.  Samples vere collected from various depths with a
  transparent Ruttner vater sampler and transferred to glass and polyethylene bottles
  for  analysis.  The results show that pH values lie between 7.0 and 9.0 in mixollmnion
  during the summer season, and the calcium content is about 30 mg/1.  The orthophosphate
  content Is about 10-15 micrograms/1 in mixollmnion during the winter, but the summer
  measurements show values below 3 mlcrograms/1.   The dominating phytoplankton species In
  1971 were the diatoms Cyclotella comta and Synedra acus during May and June,  and the
  Chlorophyta species Tetraedron punctulaturn during July and August.  The highest  number
  of Tetraedron cells was 9,200,000 cells/1,  found in August 1971.   The two methods
  of determining primary productivity on some occasions gave different results which were
  difficult to Justify.  A study of the relation between the primary production and  the
  standing crop of phytoplankton, shows that  the dally renewal cofflclent lies between
  1.0 and 0.3 in Svlnsjoen.

  INDEX TERMS:   Primary productivity.  Dominant organisms,  Physicochemlcal properties,
        Radioactivity techniques, Cyanophyta,  Diatoms,  Dlnoflagellates,  Chlorophyta,  Lake
  	Svinsjoen, Dark bottle method.
  AMIC-932U
  "AN IK SITU EXAMINATION OF THE GRAZING ACTIVITIES OF NATURAL ZOOPLANKTON  CC*MJNITIES",
  Haney,  J.  F.,  Archiv fur Hydrobiologle,  Vol.  72,  No. 1,  June 1973,  pp 87-132.

           In Heart Lake,  grazing rates for the water column exceed 100 percent/day  in
  the summer,  but become less than 10 percent/day  during the winter.   The  lower vertical
  boundary of zooplankton filter-feeding Is closely defined by a 1 ppm dissolved oxygen
  isopleth during summer stratification.   Grazing  rates measured with different food
  Items showed some  seasonal differences.   The  populations of dominant filter-feeding
 zooplankton  species  in Heart Lake corresponded with grazing rate maxima  and minima
 recorded during the  same period.   Daptmla rosea  and D. galeata were the  most Important
 grazers in Heart Lake, 1969,  together accounting for approximately  80 percent of the
 total annual grazing activity.   Several  species  of zooplankton migrate vertically  in
   irt Lake, resulting  in shifts of grazing to the upper  stratum at  night.  At least
 some species filter more rapidly  at night.  Eutrophic Heart Lake and the acid bog  lake
 were very similar, with  intense grazing  by Cladocera limited vertically  to the upper 3
 meters.   In contrast, copepod domination of the  zooplankton and extremely low grazing
 rates  uniformly distributed throughout the  water  column  characterized the oligotrophic
  ike.  A comparison of grazing  rates and primary  productivity in these three lakes
  howed (1)  high grazing and high primary productivity in Heart Lake (2)  high grazing
and low  primary productivity  In the bog  lake and  (3)  low grazing and moderate primary
  roductlvity in the oligotrophic lake,   Phytoplankton renewal rates in oligotrophic
 .akes are generally far in excess of zooplankton  grazing rates,  whereas  in eutrophic
 akea the two ratea are comparable.  Grazing rates of zooplankton communities were
measured in situ by automatically releasing a  small  quantity of P-32-labeled cells
 yeast   algae,  and bacteria) inside a plexiglass  grazing chamber In the  lake and
 AMIC-932U (Continued)
Card 2/2
 assaying the zooplankton for radioactivity after 5  min feeding.  Studies  were conducted
 in the eutrophic Heart Lake and on two occasions in a deep  oligotrophic lake and a
 shallow acid bog.

 INDEX TERMS:  Grazing, Eutrophication, Zooplankton, Primary productivity. Feeding rates,
       Trophic level,  Oligotrophy,  Bogs, Dominant organisms, Diurnal distribution,
       Heart Lake.
AMIC-9325
 "A CULTURE SYSTEM FOR ABTEMIA, DAPHHIA. AND OTHER INVERTEBRATES WITH CONTINUOUS
SEPARATION OF THE LARVAE", Sorgeloos, P., Persoone, G., Archiv fur Hydrobiologle,
Vol. 72, No. 1, June 1973, PP 133-138.

         An apparatus developed for continuous culturing of Artemia, Daphnla, and other
Invertebrates consists of five chambers, four of which have funnel-shaped bottoms,  which
are connected by tubes and siphons.  Chamber A contains the food supply which can be an
algal culture and is connected by siphons to chamber E, the water collector,  ind chamber
B, the adult culturing chamber.  Chamber B is connected by a tube from the bottom to
chamber C, the larvae collecting chamber, which in turn is connected from the side  to
chasiber D, the water supply.  To operate the system, an aquarium pump is switched on by
a timer for 5 minutes every half hour to pump water from the water supply (D)  to the
water collector (E).  This activates the siphons connecting the  food supply (A)  and the
culture chamber (B) to bring food and aerated water into chamber B.   At the same time
the inflow of water carries the larvae from B into the larvae collecting chamber C and the
overflow in C goes to the water supply (D).   A filter in the culture chamber prevents thi
transit of adults into the larval chamber.   Larvae can be  collected  by  means of  a value
in the bottom of the collecting chamber.   The equipment has  been used for 6 months  with
no special problems.

INDEX lEWB:  Cultures,  Laboratory equipment,  Waterfleas,  Automatic  control, Brine
      shrimp, Continuous cultures,  Artemia  salina, Daphnla magna.

-------
                                                                                 2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
   AMIC-9327
   "TOE EFFECT OF pH, COS, -CONCENTRATION AHD BACTERIA ON THE GROWTH OF THE BLUE-GREEN
   ALGA OSCILIATORIA REDEKEI YAH GOOR", Meffert, M.-E., Archly fur Hydroblologie.  Vol.  72,
   Ho.  2,  July"19757

            Axenlc and non-axenic suspensions of Oscillatorla redekei van Goor were
   cultivated to observe the effects of (1) deficiency of COS, (2) COS at different pH
   values, and (3) bacteria.  In axenlc suspensions, decreases of COS and pH values
   above 10 caused extensive fragmentation and autolysis, most of the trichones being
   destroyed.  In non-axenlc suspensions, fragmentation and autolysis were not so  serious,
   so that the trlchomes grovth continued.  At pH values between 7-10, growth of axenlc
   cultures without fragmentation and autolysis was only possible in the range of  pH 9.
   Trichomes  of non-axenlc suspensions showed a larger range of growth.   Measurements
   from Lake  Edeberg show that growth rate and trichome length (cells/trichcme)  correlate
   better with the free C02-concentratlon than with other parameters.  The results suggest
   that 0.  redekei fixes C02 and not bicarbonate ion even though It can tolerate only low
   concentrations of free CO2.  Lakes rich In bicarbonate and carbonate  are typical
   blotopes of blue-green algae since pH values are high and COS levels  are low.   The
   disappearance of these algae may result Iron extensive turbulence which lovers  pH
   and  Increases C02 in the epilimnlon.  Aeration of lakes to remove phosphorus  therefore
   •ay nave the secondary effect of eliminating blue-green algae.   Since algae growth
   increased and autolysis was limited in the presence  of bacteria under optima conditions
   and at high C02 levels,  the "COS-effect" of bacteria presented by Lanfte is not  valid
   for 0. redeki.
   INDEX TERMS:
         requi
Hydrogen ion concentration.  Carbon dioxide,  Photosynthesis, Nutrient
-sits, Bioassay, Cultures,  Growth rates,  Oscillatorla redeki.	
  AMIC-93a8
  "THE OCCURRENCE OF MICROTUKBELLARIA IN SOME BRITISH LAKES OF DIVERSE CHEMICAL CONTENT",
  Young, J. 0., Archly fur Hydroblologie. Vol. 72, Mo. 2, July 1973, pp 202-224.

           The distribution and seasonal occurrence of Mlcroturbellaria In three
  different habitats In the littoral zone of calcium-rich, lowland, 'productive' lakes
  and calcium-poor,  upland, 'unproductive* lakes were Investigated over the course of a
  year using three different sampling methods.  Sampling methods, and methods used in the
  extraction from  samples and identification of Microturbellarla are described.   Eleven
  species occurred In both lake types, eight species occurred in Ca-rlch lakes,  and
  eleven species occurred in Ca-poor lakes.   The total number of species collected from 6
 calcium-rich and 6  calcium-poor lakes visited at monthly Intervals over a year ranged
 fron 9 to 12 species and 3 to 18 species,  respectively.  Species recorded frequently
 seemed to have a wide distribution within  the range of habitats considered in  each lake.
 Species with a more restricted habitat distribution were these recorded only
 Infrequently.   A study of  the  vertical distribution of Microturbellaria on the floor of
  calcium-rich lake suggested  that some species were confined to the littoral  and other
'species occurred also in the deeper water.   The peak number of specimens recorded in
[calcium-poor and calcium-rich lakes occurred in July and May to July, respectively.
     oglcal notes  are presented on  some of  the common species found.

INDEX TERMS:  Calcium,  Lakes, Population, Distribution patterns, Water quality,
      Turbellaria.
                                                                            AMIC-9329
                                                                            "EXPERDOTML ECOLOGICAL IHVESTIGATIONS OF CHRIONOMUB THUMg AMD CHIROHDMU5 PIGER
                                                                            (DIPTERA, CHIRONOMIDAE)", Scharf, B. W., Archlv fur Hydrobloing-l«.—vol—7?" So—5
                                                                            July 1973, PP 225-2W*.                                	—Si_»    •   .   •  .

                                                                                     In the year 1956 the species Chironomus thumal was divided Into two subspecies
                                                                            which in 1972 vere elevated to species; C. thumni and C. piger.  In t^g ^^
                                                                            the ecological differences between the species in relation to temperature and oxygen
                                                                            pressures were investigated.  Differences were found in the resistance to cold  and the
                                                                            duration of development at different temperatures and at various oxygen pressures
                                                                            The larvae of C.  piger are more resistant to cold than those of C  thummi which is in
                                                                            accord with what Is known from natural conditions.  The African C. pulcher is less
                                                                            resistant than £. thumnl.  No significant differences in the heat "resistance and the
                                                                            preferred temperature of the two species could be found.  At  0 and 15 C the embryos
                                                                            of C.  thumal develop more slowly than those of C. piger. but the development from egg
                                                                            to imago occurs quicker In C. thumnl.  The observation that the larvae of C  thiuml are
                                                                            more resistant to anaerobic conditions than those of C. jiger can be confirmed by means
                                                                            of the rearing under diminished oxygen pressures.

                                                                            INDEX TERK3:   Dlptera, Cold resistance.  Dissolved oxygen,  Heat resistance, Chironcraus
                                                                                  piger,  Chironomus thummi,  Chlronomis pulcher.
                                                                           AMIC-9330
                                                                           ROTENONE WTHODS  DJ A LARGE  RIVERSYSTEM", Hocutt,  C.  H.,  Hambrick,  P.  S.   Nfesnik
                                                                           M. T., Archiv fur Hydroblologle, Vol. 72, No. 2, June 1973, pp 2U5-252.''        '

                                                                                    The use  of rotenone, block net, and potassium permanganate was tested as  a
                                                                           method for sampling fish in  the New River, Virginia and West Virginia.  Six sites  were
                                                                           sampled by stretching the net across the river and applying about 3 8  liters of 2  5
                                                                           percent emulsified rotenone  at a location 68-91 meters above the net.  The  water was
                                                                           detoxified by distributing approximately two pounds of potassium permanganate  below the
                                                                           block net.  Fish  were collected from the net, preserved,  and identified   Data on  numbers
                                                                           and kinds of fish were analyzed by a computer program which calculated diversity and
                                                                           redundancy for rotenone  and  seine data.  The species  and  number collected by rotenoning
                                                                           at each station is listed.   Rotenone collections yielded  1»0 species compared to  36 by
                                                                           seine.  Thirty-one species were cannon to both methods.   Species collected by  the
                                                                           rotenone method but not  by seine were:  Nocomis leptocephalus. Noturus insignis
                                                                           Cottua b. balrdl, Lepomis cyanellus. Etheostoma caeruleum. ET osburni  Percina
                                                                           maculata. Ictalurua punctatus, and Pylodictua ollvarls.   All except the latter two
                                                                           species are uncommon In  the  Bain-channel New River.  Species collected only by seine
                                                                           have scattered distributions and may not have been collected by rotenoning because of
                                                                           seasonal variations.  Meanvalues of diversity and redundancy for rotenone were 3.11 and
                                                                           0.3U, respectively, compared with 2.73 and 0.31 for seining.   Rotenone techniques
                                                                           yielded an average of 26 species per collection compared to lU by seine over the same
                                                                           area.  The rotenone method is concluded to be a valuable sampling procedure.

                                                                           IHDEX TERMS:  Rotenone,  Sampling, Nets, Freshwater fish. Species  diversity,  Redundancy,
                                                                                         31

-------
                                                                                2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-931H
  •GERMANIUM INCORPORATION INTO THE SILICA OF DIATOM CELL WALLS", Azam, F.,  Henmingsen,
  B.E., Archiv fur Mikrobiologie, Vol. 92, No. 1, July 10, 1973, pp 11-20.

           A non-photosynthic diatom, Kltzschia alba; two marine photoeynthetlc
  diatoms, Cyllndrotheca fusiformls and Cyclotella nana; and a freshwater photosynthetic
  diatom, Navicula pelllculosa, were exposed to various ratios of Ge-68-labeled
  Ge{OH)VSi(OH)f (0.01, 0.1, or 1.0) in an attempt to trace the metabolic fate of Ge and
  to examine the possibility that Ge might follow the same metobolic pathway as Si.  Cell
  counts, viability, Ge uptake and Incorporation, Isotope discrimination,  silicic acid
  uptake, and effects of Ge on metabolism were determined.  The diatoms took up labelled
  germanic acid from their growth media and incorporated up to 80 percent of it into the
  silica of their cell walls.  Sllicification appeared to be required for germanium
  Incorporation.   The uptake and Incorporation of gennanlc acid was dependent upon the
  relative concentrations of Ge and Si.   At Ge/Si of 0.01, no inhibition of  growth or of
  silicic acid uptake by N.  alba was observed.   The cell morphology was also normal and
  60 to 80 percent of the Ge-68 taken up was incorporated.  At Ge/Si of 0.1,  silicic
  acid uptake and growth of N.  alba were inhibited by about 95 percent.  Concomitantly,
  striking morphological aberrations occurred.   10 to 20 percent of the Ge-68(OH)U taken
  up was incorporated.   The possible use of labeled Ge(OH)U for the study  of silicon
  metabolism is discussed.

  INDEX TERMS:  Diatoms,  Growth rates, Absorption,  Bioassay,  Eadioactivity techniques,
        Germanium, Silicon, Metabolic pathways,  Transport,  Viability.
                       AMIC-931*5
                       "TOXICm OF THE  HERBICIDE  KURON (SILVEX) TO BLUEGILL EGGS AND FRY", Wilbur, R.  L.,
                       Whitney, E.  W., Transactions  of the American Fisheries Society. Vol. 102, No. 3,
                       July 1973, PP  630-633.

                               Experimental treatment with herbicide Kuron of two alligatorweed-infested
                       North Carolina streams  was  initiated by the U. S. Army Corps of Engineers in summer,
                       1965.  Surveillance  of  fish and Invertebrate populations was provided by the U. S.
                     I  Bureau of Sport Fisheries and Wildlife.  The effects of Kuron on bluegill eggs and fry
                       were examined  under  laboratory  conditions to provide Insight on how reproduction of the
                       sunfish family may have been  affected by Kuron treatments applied to the streams.  Eggs
                       from each of nine bluegills were  treated with Kuron  concentrations of 0.0 ppm (control),
                       1.0  ppm, 1.0 ppm, 5.0 ppm,  and  10.0 ppm acid equivalents.  Analysis of variance
                       indicated that hatching was not significantly affected by treatments but that survival of
                       fry  to an age  of  6 days was affected by the treatments.  No fry survived at 10.0 ppm
                       and  only a token  few survived the 5.0 ppm treatment.

                       INDEX TERMS:   Pesticide toxicity, Herbicides, Fish eggs,  Fry, Water pollution effects,
                            Bioassay, Fish reproduction, Sunfishes, Freshwater fish, Chlorinated hydrocarbon
                            pesticides,  Lethal limit, Kuron,  Lepomis macrochirus.  Survival,  Meaian tolerance
                            limit.
 AMIC-93U3
 "NITROGEN FIXATION BY THE UNICELLULAR BLUE-GREEN ALGA APHAHOTHECE".
 Archiv fur Mlkroblologle, Vol. 92, No. 1, July 10, 1973, pp 59-62.
Singh, P. K.,
          The alga Aphanothece sp., which grows vigorously  in rice fields of the
 Central Rice Research Institute, India, was isolated for use in determining rates of
 nitrogen fixation in media free of combined nitrogen.  Nitrogen fixation was
 estimated by the mlcro-KJeldahl technique.  Cells were counted using a haemoeytometer.
 The  nlgn grew welJl both in media containing nitrate and in media lacking nitrate.
 Little lag occurred when cells grown in media containing nitrate were transferred to
 a nitrate-lacking medium,  and growth continued for 18-25 days.  The generation time
 for  this alga was 12 hr, and more than 2 mg of N were fixed in 25 days.  Other algae
 (Plectonema and  Anacystis) from a similar habitat failed to grow in medium lacking
nitrate.

INDEX TERMS:   Nitrates,  Bioassay,  Nutrient requirements, Nitrogen fixation, Aphanothece,
      Culture  media.
AMIC-93U8
"BOTTOM MACROFAUHA IN THE GOCZALKOWICE DAM RESERVOIR IN THE YEARS 1965.1969",
Krzyzanek, E., Acta Hydroblologlca. Cracow, Vol. 15, No. 2, 1973, PP 169-196.

         Investigations of the bottom macrofauna of the rinm reservoir at Goczalkowice
were carried out from 1965-1969 as a continuation of those carried out from the
beginning of its existence.  Samples were taken at permanent points situated in U zones
of the reservoir for analysis.  The temperature of the water was 1O and 25 C, the pH
value being 7.5-8.0.   In the years 1965-1967 a further decrease in the amount of bottom
macrofauna was observed, but from 1968 there was a gradual increase.   Ollgochaeta and
the larvae of Chlronomldae (mainly Procladius and Chironomus plumosus) dominated
quantitatively.  The number of large Mollusca,  mainly Unio plctorum,  also Increased.
The upper and central zones were most numerously populated by the bottom macrofauiB.
Usually the encountered forms had already been noted in previous years.

INDEX IERMS:  Benthlc fauna,  Reservoirs,  Systenatics,  Speciation,  Aquatic  inlands,
      Aquatic Insects,  Mollusks,  Annelida, Dominant  organisms, Nematodes,  Crustaceans,
      Bottom sampling,  Macroinvertebrates.

-------
  AMK-93^9
  "CTMJLATION OF RADIOACTIVE SUBSTANCE IN DAM RESERVOIRS",  Kwapulinski,  J,,  Acta
  Hydrobiologlca. Cracow, Vol. 15, No. 2, 1973,  PP 215-225.

           Benthos, periphyton, phytoplankton, zooplankton, bottom sediment, and higher
  plant samples were obtained from one rheollmnle and two limnic reservoirs  to
  Investigate the accumulation of radiolsotopes  in the various components.   Three
  accumulation values were calculated for sediments and periphyton by dividing sample
  concentration by (l) specific water concentration or (2)  by the mean concentration for
  water, and (3) by dividing mean sample concentration by mean water concentration.
  Values for other organisms were obtained using specific sample values  and  mean water
  values.  The sediments accumulated radioisotopes 1,600 to 9,500 times  depending on the
  type of sediment and hydrologic conditions. Periphyton accumulations  ranged from  10O to
  98,000 times.  Other accumulations were:  benthos,  5,900-12,000 times; zooplankton,
  ^,300-7,1*00 tiroes; phytoplankton, 7,200-13,000 times;  and aquatic plants,  8,700Jw,OOO
  times.  It Is concluded that because of the large uptake  abilities of  the  sediments
  and organisms, self-purification processes are active  In  the reservoirs except in  the
  event of turbulence when recontamination occurs.   Periphyton should be useful as
  bioindlcators of beta radioactivity contamination and  also provide useful  Information
  on previous contamination levels.
                                                                                2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  INDEX TERMS:   Radloisotopee,  Benthos,  Periphyton, Phytoplankton, Zooplankton, Sediments,
        Aquatic plants, Bloindicators, Biological magnification, Bioaccumulation.
 AMIC-9357
 "HALF-SATURATION COHSTAHT5  FOR UPTAKE OF NITRATE AND AMMONIA BY RESERVOIR PLANKTON",
 Toetz,  D. W.,  Vare*,  L.  P.) Loughran, E. D., Ecology, Vol. 5U, Ho. U, Summer 1973,
 pp 903-906.

         Observations were  made  in order to learn  If the uptake of NHl* and N03 by
 freshwater plankton can be  described by the Mlchaelis-Menten expression.  Uptake of N03
 and NHlt by reservoir plankton was estimated at  5 concentrations using N-15 tracer
 techniques.  A hyperbola results when the uptake velocity (v) of H03 and NHU is plotted
 against concentration (S).   The  S/v vs S transformation of the Mlchaelis-Menten
 expression was used to estimate  K sub a.  For a mixed population of blue-green algae
 in Lake Carl Blackwell,  Oklahoma,  K sub s was about U3 mg N03-M/(eu m), when the initial
 concentration  was  7.53 mg N03-N/(eu m).  In Lake Keystone, where the Initial
 concentration  of N03JJ was  1*19.17 mg/(cu m), enrichment with N03 Increased v in a
 similar way, suggesting use of the Mlchaelis-Menten model may not be realistic.

 INDEX TERMS:   Absorption, Ammonia,  Nitrates, Plankton, Reservoirs, Water temperature,
        Lake Carl Blackwell, Half saturation constants, Sample preparation, Michaelis-
        Menten  equation,  Transparency.
 AMIC-9356
 "FIELD STUDIES ON PHOTOSYNTHESIS OF CLADOPHORA GLOMERATA  (CHLOROPHYTA) IN GREEN BAY,
 LAKE MICHIGAN", Adams, M. S., Stone. W., Ecology, Vol. 51*, No. k, Sumner 1973,
 pp 853-862.

          Net photosynthesis of Cladophora glomerata was measured at three sites in
 lower Green Bay,  Lake Michigan, from late spring through  summer, 1971-  Lower levels of
 productivity occurred early in the season at two of the sites, when water temperatures
 were lowest.   At  the third site water temperature and productivity varied the least.
 Contrary  to other reports, it was found that Cladophora made relatively efficient use of
 low illumination.   Under statistically similar temperature and irradlance levels,
 productivity  was  higher with Increasing proximity to the  mouth of the Fox River.
 litrogen,  calcium,  strontium, sodium, and zinc also were  highest In concentration in
 slants  receiving  the greatest amount of effluents from the Fox River in comparison with
 ;he  site receiving the least.  Site differences in productivity appear to be related to
nutrient levels, whereas  seasonal differences In productivity are probably most closely
 elated to  seasonal  temperature differences.

INDEX TERMS:  Photosynthesis,  Chlorophyta,  On-site data collections, Environmental
      effects  Hater pollution effects,  Aquatic algae.  Chemical analysis, Plant tiSBues,
      Cladophora glomerata, Green Bay, Chemical composition. Fox River, Seasonal
      variation, Photosynthetic  rates, Data, interpretation.
AMIC-9367
 "SEASONAL CHANGES IN POPULATION DENSITY AND VERTICAL DISTRIBUTION OF PHOEOBRANCK
VELIGERS IN OFFSHORE PLANKTON AT PLYMOUTH", Fretter, V., Shale, D., Journal of the
Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom. Vol. 53, No. 3, August 1973,
pp "71-^92.

         Vertical and horizontal hauls were taken at approximately fortnightly Intervals
from April 1969 to April 1970 at L 3 (lat.  Uo degrees 17.7 minutes N,  long, k degrees
11.2 minutes W) and L U (lat. 50 degrees 15 minutes N,  long.  U degrees 12.5 minutes W).
Thirty-two species of prooobranch veliger were present at L 3, these larvae were not as
numerous at L U and only 26 species were recorded.  The number of species was highest in
the summer:  the number of veligers was highest in February.   After mid October both the
number of species and the abundance of veligers decreased rapidly and remained low until
early February.  Veligers of some species occurred later at L 3 and L ** than In more
Inshore waters and these were probably individuals carried beyond tidal influences which
would normally lead to settlement on the shore.  They Included Lacuna  vincta,  Littorina
littorea and L. nerltoldea.  Veligers of all ages were  found  it all depths.  At their
time of "greatest abundance veligers of many species occurred  maximally nt 5  or 10  m,
with a variable decrease towards greater depths and a sudden  one towards the surface.
This distribution later changed giving a proportionally  greater number at. greater  depth.
When numbers were low the larvae scattered  through the water  column with little  or no
Indication of a preferred depth.  An examination of the  age composition of veligers  of
rissoids, Hatlca alder1, Nassarlus  retlculatus and Phllbertla linear!s  from  certain
catches shoved that the surface accumulation at the time  of abundance was  composed of a
high percentage of young veligers:   in an ageing population there was a  higher percentage
of larvae, especially the older ones,  at greater depths,  except for Nassarlus  rcticulatus
                                                                                        33

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-9367 (Continued)
Card 2/2
  which consistently showed maximal  numbers  above  10 m until  the  larvae became scarce.
  When blooms of Phaeocystls  occurred they affected the distribution, driving the larvae
  away from the surface.

  INDEX TERMS:  Larval growth stage,  Ecological  distribution, Gastropods, Mollusks,
        Invertebrates, Salinity,  Water temperature, Veligers, Population density,
        Seasonal variation, Vertical distribution,  Sample preservation, Marine
        environment.
  AMIC-9370
  'BROWN SEAWEED AS AN INDICATOR OF HEAVY METALS IN ESTUARIES IN SOUTH-WEST ENGLAHD",
  Bryan,  G.  W.,  Hummerstone,  L. G., Journal of the Marine Biological Association of  the
  United  Kingdom.  Vol.  53,  No.  3, August 1973,  PP 705-720.
          Concentrations of copper, zinc, lead, aluminum, manganese and Iron in the
 brown seaweed Fucus vestculosus have been measured in samples collected over its range
 of distribution In four estuaries having different degrees of metal contamination.
 Factors  controlling the concentrations in the weed have been studied and Include the
 concentrations of metals In the water, seasonal changes, the position of the weed in
 the intertidal zone and the particular portion of the plant which is analyzed.  It is
 concluded that analysis of the weed gives a reasonable indication of average conditions
 in  the water at points along an estuary and provides a method of making comparisons with
 the same  estuary In subsequent years or with other estuaries.

INDEX TERMS:   Phaeophyta,  Kelps, Estuarlne environment, Heavy metals, Blolndlcators,
      Water pollution.  Pollutant identification, Plant tissues. Chemical analysis,
      Water analysis. Seasonal variation,  England, Biological magnification.
AMC-9373
 "THE ZOSTERA EPIFAUHAL CCMflJHITY IH THE YORK RIVER, VIRGINIA", fersh, G. A., Chesapeake
Science, Vol. lU, Ho. 2, June 1973, PP 87-97.

         The Invertebrate epifauna occurring on Zostera marina L. in the lower York
Fiver, Virginia, was sampled with the aid of SCUBA for 1^ consecutive months from a
collecting station located at each of three different water depths within a single
eelgrass bed.  The plants were clipped at their bases and the organisms were washed
from the plants into a 0.5-mm sieve, then preserved in 9-10 percent seawater-fornalln
solution.  Each blade was stripped of sediment, epiphytes and sessile fauna.
Cleansed plants were oven-dried at 80 C for M5 hr, then weighed to the nearest 0,1 g.
A total of 112 invertebrate species were collected.  The five most abundant non-colonial
species (Bittlum varlum, Paracercels caudate., Crepidula convexa, Ampithoe longlmana and
Erlchsonella attenuate] accounted for approximately 59 percent of the total fauna.
These species dominated the epifauna throughout most of the year.  Several other
species, Including Bain mis iMprovisus, Molgula manhattensis, Polydora ligni and
Ercolanla fuscata, were abundant for only brief periods.  A relatively high average
index of~~afflnlty (58 percent) between all synchronous sample pairs indicated a
generally homogeneous fauna, although several species were differentially distributed
with depth.  Exfoliation of Zostera after June caused a steady decline in plant blomass,
but the abundance of epifauna continued to increase into the summer and fall.  Lowest
total numbers and species counts occurred in February and early March.  Diversity
values (H1) ranged from 1.92 to 3.90 bits/individual and averaged 3.0^ bits/individual
for all stations.   High species numbers In summer were generally counteracted by
relatively low equltabilltiea (epsilon), with H'  showing little seasonal change.  The
primary sources of nutrition for the epifauna appeared to be (1) plankton and suspended
                  AMIC-9373 (Continued)
                                                                       Card 2/2
                  partlculate matter, (2) detritus and microorganisms on the plant blades, and (3)
                  epiphytic algae.

                  INDEX TERMS:  Biological communities, Food webs, Fish food organisms, Marine
                        plant*. Marine animals, Blomasa, Dominant organisms, Estuarine environment. Marine
                        mlcroorganlams, Crustaceans, Annelids, Mollusks, Nematodes, Rotifers, Diatoms,
                        Marine fish, Diptera, Epiphytes, Epifauna, Eelgrass, York River, Seasonal
                        variation. Species abundance, Species diversity, Zostera marina, Macroinvertebr-atea,
                        Flatworms, Acorn worms, Tunlcates, Sponges, Bryozoa, Coelenterates, Nemerteans.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL MBTHODS
   AM1C-937U
   'XARVAE OF THE BURROWIHG SHRIMP,  UPOGEBIA  AFFINIS.  (CRUSTACEA, DECAPCDA, UPCGEBIIDAE),
   FROM VIRGINIA PLANKTON", Sandlfer,  P.  A.,  Cheaapeake  Science. Vol.  lU, Ho. 2, June 1973,
   pp 98-10U.

            Four zoeal stages of Upogebia affinis taken  in plankton samples from the York
   River estuary and adjacent lower  Chesapeake Bay, Virginia,  are described and figured.
   Upogebia affinis zoeae may be identified readily In plankton sanples.  Distinguishing
   characteristics Include an unarmed  carapace and rostrum in  «n stages, the shape ami
   splnation of the telson, and the  flattened appearance of the endopodltes of the
   pereiopode in late stages.

   INDEX TCRMS:   Larval growth stage,  Zooplankton, Chesapeake Bay, Crustaceans,
         Invertebrates,  Estuarine environment, Marine animals, Upogebia afflnls, York
         River,  Zoeae, Animal  morphology, Burrowing shrimp.
  AMIC-9376
  "STANDIHG CROP OF SALT MARSHES SURROUNDING CHINCOTEAGUE BAY, MARYLAHD-VIHOINIA",
  Keefe,  C. V.,  Boynton,  W. F., Chesapeake Science. Vol. Ik, No. 2, June 1973,
  pp  117-123.

           Chlncoteague Bay is surrounded by approximately 95 sq km (23,OOO acres) of
  Irregularly,flooded salt marsh dominated by short Spartina alterniflpra.   The •HH™™
 standing  crop,  chemical composition,  and live:dead ratio of the marsh grasses were
 estimated from  samples  taken at 20 marsh stations In August, 1970.   Samples consisting
 of all the aerial plant parts were taken from a total of 20 sites.   Plant parts  lying
 on the ground and no  longer  attached  to the plant were also Included In the sample.
 Die samples were oven-dried  to constant weight  at 100 C, and the estimated weight of
 plant material per  sq m at each station was determined.  To obtain velfdits of organic
 naterial,  the samples were ground,  charred,  and burned at 550 C until the ash weight
   Mined constant.  Ash-free dry weight was then determined as the difference between
 the  weight of the ash and the weight  of the subsample.   The pulverized samples were
 analyzed for C,  N, P, K, Ca,  and Kg.  Live  standing crop ranged from U27  to 558  g dry
matter/sq  m and 335  to U70 g  organic matter/sq m.   The total standing crop of live
 Oants consisted of  U8 million kg of dry material  of which 39 million kg  was  organic
	terlal.   Chemical  analysis  indicated  that phosphorus  and potassium were rapidly
 cached from the dead plants while magnesium tended to  be retained.   Llverdead ratios
ranged from 0.9  to 2.3 and were lower than those found  in regularly  flooded marshes.

INDEX TERMS:  Standing crops, Salt marshes, Tidal  marshes,  Organic matter. Chemical
      analyolB,  Chemical composition,  Marsh grasses,  Chlncoteague Bay,  Sample prepara-
      tion, Species  abundance, Spartina alterniflorm.
 AMC-9377
 "MORTALITY OF MARKET-SIZED OYSTERS (CRASSOSTREA VIHGINICA) IH THE VICINITY OF A
 DHEDGIHD OPERATION",  Rose, C.  D.,  Chesapeake  Science, Vol. lU, Bo. 2, June 1973,
 PP 135-138.

          The oyster lease in Palmetto Bayou,  southern Louisiana, was inspected U-5 monthi
 after dredging occurred to determine sediment-induced damage to market-sized oysters.
 It was assumed that mortality near the  spoil  bank would exceed that at  site further from
 the bank.  The average mortality of market-sized  oysters collected at seven sampling
 stations within 595 m of a spoil bank crossing the  oyster lease was 57  percent, as
 compared to an average mortality of 17  percent of the remainder of the  lease.  Sediment
 (2-15 cm thick)  commonly covered oysters  taken from the affected area.  Theoretical
 mortality was estimated to be  U8 percent.

 INDEX TERMS:   Mortality,  Dredging,  Sedimentation, Environmental effects, Oysters,
       Mollusks,  Marine animals,  Spoil banks, Bottom sampling. Shellfish farming,
       Shellfish, Estuarine environment, Invertebrates,  Eastern oyster,  Crassostrea
       vlrginlca, Palmetto Bayou, Macrolnvertebrates, Data Interpretation.
AMIC-9378
 "CHANGE IH FEEDING AND BODY CONDITION OF BHDWN BULLHEADS OVERWINTERING IN THE
HEATED EFFLUEHT OF A POWER PLANT", Massenglll, R. R., Chesapeake Science, Vol. Ik,
No. 2, June 1973, PP 138-lM.

         Winter food habits and condition factors of the brown bullhead,  Ictalurus
nebuloBUB. were determined from specimens collected in the discharge canal of the
Connecticut Yankee Atomic Power Company plant and Chapman Pond,  a cove of the
Connecticut River unaffected by artificial heating.   Stomach content analysis indicated
that fish overwintering in the heated discharge fed while those  in water  at 2 C  from
Chapman Pond did not.  Fish,  annelids,  Insects,  molluscs and zooplankton  were
consumed, with fish the most abundant food.   Bullheads began feeding before the
temperature reached U C in Chapman Pond.  The normal bullhead diet of Invertebrates
shifted to smaller fish in the densely populated canal.   Although the bullheads  In the
canal fed throughout the winter,  their body condition was poorer than that of fish
overwintering in Chapman Pond.

MIJEX TERMS:  Thermal stress,  Heated  water,  Water pollution  effects,  Food  habits,  Fish
      physiology,  Powerplants, Fish food organisms,  Life  cycles, Annelids, Aquatic
      insects, Overwintering  sites, Mollusks,  Zooplankton, Crustaceans, Freshwater fish,
      Brown bullhead, Ictalurus nebulosus, Chapman Pond,  Elvers, Stomach analysis.
                                                                                        35

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMICJ9380
  "MUD SHRIMP (CALUANASSA) LAKVAE (CRUSTACEA,  DECAPODA,  CALLIAHASSIDAE}  FROM VIRGINIA
  PLANKTON", Sandifer,  P. A., Chesapeake Science,  Vol.  lU,  Ho.  3,  September 1973,
  pp 1U9-159.

           Larval stages attributed to three species of Calltanassa (designated as
  spp. A, B and C) taken In plankton samples from the lower Chesapeake Bay are  described
  and figured.  Evidence concerning tentative Identification of spp.  A and B IB
  discussed, and It is suggested that these larvae may be ascribed to Calllaaassa
  blformls and Calllanassa atlantlca, respectively.

  INDEX TERM;:  Zooplankton, Chesapeake Bay,  Larval growth  stage.  Crustaceans,
        Invertebrates,  Ecological distribution, Estuarine environment,  Mud shrimp, Zoeae,
        Animal morphology,  Sample preservation.
AMIC-9383 (Continued)
Card 2/2
 INDEX TERMS:  Zooplankton, Ecology, Ponds, Freshwater, Crustaceans, Copepods,
      Invertebrates, Physlcochemlcal properties, Aquatic plants, Speclatlon, Water
      chemistry, Waterfleas, Growth stages, Rotifers, Species abundance, Microphytes.
 AMC-9383
 "COMPARATIVE ECOLOGY AND ZOOPIANKTON OF TWO MARYLAND POMES INCLUDING A CONGENERIC
 OCCURRENCE OF DIAPTOMUS (CALANOEDA:  COPEPODAJ", Smrchek, J. C., Chesapeake Science,
 Vol. 14, No. 3, September 1973, PP 188-196.

          Two freshwater ponds, one permanent (Pond 1) and the other temporary (Pond
 2), located on the western Maryland shore of the upper Chesapeake Bay were studied
 periodically from April 1970 to January 1971.  Periodic phyBiochemical data, plant and
 zooplankton samples, and general seasonal observations were obtained.  The temporary
 pond became dry in mid-September and remained so until late November.  Free carbon
 lloxlde,  dissolved oxygen, and hardness fluctuated irregularly throughout the study.
 In  August the pH In the permanent pond decreased greatly with little subsequent
 recovery.   After Pond 2 again contained water, hardness Increased to over 1*OO percent
of  values before drying.   Lists of aquatic flowering plants were prepared for both
 xmds.  Each pond contained a distinct assemblage  of zooplankters probably Influenced
 ,y  the amount of aquatic vegetation present.   Total zooplankton species numbers In each
xsod were almost  equal, but the temporary pond contained greater quantities of
.ooplankton.  Two generations per year of D.  sanguineus were found in Pond 2.
 ubranchlpus vernalla (Verrlll)  and E.  holaaniT
 '•  the general life cycle of  these  anostracans is briefly outlined.  A congeneric
xcurrence of two calanold copepods Dlaptomus birgei Marsh and D. sanguineus Forbes
 S found in May in temporary Pond  2.   Both are of the same subgenue (Onychodiaptomus
 laht)   Various causes and mechanisms  explaining congeneric occurrences are briefly
 eviewed   Slight size differences,  insufficient time due to several factors discussed,
 or competitive exclusion to  operate to completion,  and partial seasonal separation
 jpear to best explain the present  co-occurrence.
AMIC-9381*
 'THE BIOLOGY OF BROWH ALGAE OH THE ATLANTIC COAST OF VIRGINIA.  II.  PETALONIA
FASCIA AMD SCYTOSIPHOll LOMENTARIA", Rhodes, R. G., Connell,  M. U.,  Chesapeake Science,
Vol. 1U, No. 3, September 1973, pp 211-215.

         Microscopic, brown nlgnl crusts and filaments were  collected in the summer
from an oyster reef on the Atlantic coast of Virginia and isolated  Into culture.
Developmental studies showed that the isolates were microscopic stages of Petalpnia and
Scytoslphon.  These two brown algae exist the year around In the form of either
microscopic or macroscopic plants.  In culture no sexual reprduction was found linking
the two stages of either Petalonla or Scytoslphon.  The zoospores from the macroscopic
plants of Petalonla and Scytoslphon developed directly into  crusts  and Initials on  the
crusts developed directly Into macroscopic plants.  Culture  conditions of 10 C and  a
9-15 hour photoperiod stimulated the development of macrothalli In  both taxa.

INDEX TERMS:  Plant growth,  Phaeophyta,  Plant morphology.  Marine algae,  Marine plants,
      Cultures, Germination,  Water temperature.  Salinity,  Benthlc flora, Sessile algae,
      Speclatlon,  Biology, Petalonla fascia,  Scytosiphon  lomentarla,  Plant development,
      Culturlng techniques.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
   "A NEW MULTIPARAfCTER SEPARATOR FOR MICROSCOPIC PARTICLES AUD BIOLOGICAL CELLS",
   Stelntaunp, J. A., Fulwyler, M. J., Coulter, J. R., et al., Review of Scientific
   Instruments, Vol. W», No. 9, September 1973, PP 1301-1310.

            A new  flow-system  instrument for quantitative analysis and sorting of
   microscopic particles, particularly biological cells, based on multiple measurements of
   physical and biochemical properties has been developed.  Cells stained with fluorescent
   dyes In liquid  suspension enter a unique flow chamber where electrical and optical
   sensors measure cell volume, single- or two-color fluorescence, and light scatter, and
   emerge In a liquid Jet that Is broken Into uniform droplets.  Sensor signals are
   electronically  processed several ways for optimum cell discrimination and are displayed
   as pulse-amplitude distributions using a pulse-height analyzer.  Processed
   signals trigger cell sorting according to preselected parametric criteria.  Sorting la
   accomplished by electrically charging droplets containing the cells and
   electrostatically deflecting them Into collection vessels.  This Instrument is described
   in detail with  illustrative examples of experiments using polystyrene fluorescent
   mlcrospheres, cultured human cells, and human leukocytes.

   INDEX  TERMS:  Instrumentation, Separation techniques, Cytologlcal studies, Sorting,
         Staining, Counting, Counting chambers.
 AMIC-olllS
 "PREPARATION OF SLUE FEFIPHYTON FOR VARIOUS PHDDUCTIVm ANALYSES",  Czarnecki,  D. B.,
 Williams, H. D., Nordhelm,  E.  I., Transactions of the American Microscopical Society,
 Vol.  92,  No. 3,  July 1973,  PP  36U-37T:

          An analytical procedure which employs ultrasonic vibration for the removal
 of diatoms from microscope  slides has  been used to obtain data on community chlorophyll
 content and diatom composition from the same sample.   In this procedure the periphyton
 slide Is placed In a polyethylene bag  filled with MgC03 saturated 90 percent acetone and
 the bag suspended In a vibrator filled with tap water and a small amount of wetting
 agent.   The instrument Is set  at mnxlimim cavltation for 30  mln after which the bag is
 removed,  its content poured into centrifuge tubes and centrifuged at top speed for 10
 mln.  Acetone solutions of  the contents were analyzed for chlorophyll content.
 Dilutions and centrlfugations  of the remaining tubes  yield  a suspension from which the
 diatom  frustules may be cleaned and mounted.   In applying the above technique, a
 recovery rate of over 99 percent was maintained using slide substrates Incubated over
 a period of 8 weeks.

 INDEX TERMS:  Periphyton, Primary productivity,  Diatoms,  Systematics,  Methodology,
      Measurement,  Chrysophyta,  Biological communities, Chlorophyll,  Algae,
      Slide preparation,  Sample preparation,  Frustules, Recovery.
  AMIC-9^17
  "A CONTRIBUTION TO THE ECOLOGY AND DISTRIBUTION OF AQUATIC ACARI IN THE ST.  LAWRENCE
  CHEAT LAKES",  Modlin,  R.  F.,  Gannon,  J.  E.,  Transactions of the American Microscopical
  Society, Vol.  92,  No.  2,  April 1973,  PP
          Aquatic Acarl  were Investigated in benthlc,  pLanktonic,  and neustonic
 habitats in Lakes  Michigan, Huron,  Superior,  and St.  Clair.  Sampling was carried
 out using bottom grab samplers,  plankton nets and specially designed floating nets
 modified from Zaitsev (1963).  The  mites were preserved in 10 percent formalin in the
 field and transferred to Koenike's  solution in the laboratory. Temporary mounts  were
 made in 5O percent lactic acid solution.  Of the 382  Great. Lakes  specimens examined, 15
 genera and 21 species were  found.   These collections  Increased the number of known
 Great Lakes water mites to  21  genera and 32 species.   The water mites were not
 abundant In terms of blomass nor species composition.  The scarcity of aquatic
 vegetation Is  an Important  limiting factor.   Benthic  littoral and subllttoral habitats
 had the greatest numbers of individuals  and species.   Species composition and blomass
 diminished  rapidly with depth.  Hygrobates longipalpis and Lebertia porosa were most
abundant and widely distributed In benthlc habitats.   Fiona rotunda and Unlonleola
crasaipes were most common  In  the plankton and Hydrozetes, Llmnobalaearua.  and
SoldanelTonyx were  unique to the neuBton.

INDEX TERMS'  Ecological distribution, Great  Lakes, Aquatic habitats,  Ecology, Limiting
      factors, Speclatlon,  Animal groupings, Water mites,  Hydracarlna, Neuston, Species
      abundance. Sample  preservation.
                                                                                        37
AMIC-9U19
"STERILE CULTURE TECHNIQUES FOR SPECIES OF THE ROTIFER ASPLANCHH/f, Alola, R. C.,
Moretti, R. L., Transactions of the American Microscopical Society, Vol. 92, No.
July 1973, PP 36U-371.
3,
         Several new techniques are subscribed for culturing the rotifer Aaplanchna
brightvelll, the protozoan, Paramecluro aurella, and the bacterium Aerobacter aerogenes.
The bacterium Is grown at 37 C, harvested by centrlfugatlon,  and stored in a
separatory funnel In a concentrated suspension at k C.  Allquots of the bacterial
medium are fed to cultures of paramecla which are maintained  at 31 C.   Portions of the
paramecia solutions, in turn, are fed to rotifer populations  at room temperature.  The
entire culture scheme Is sustained by employing aseptic procedures.  Sterile culture
conditions were maintained by working under aseptic hoods containing UV germicidal
lamps turned on at all times.  The glasware was vigorously washed in Tide,  thoroughly
rinsed In tap and diatilled water, drained dry, wrapped in tin foil,  and autoclaved at
15 psi for 20 min.  Glassware used for chemicals was washed separately  from that used
for bacteria, paramecia, and rotifers.

INDEX TERJ6:  Protozoa,  Bacteria,  Rotifers,  Methodology,  Life cycles, Growth rates,
      Harvesting,  Microorganisms,  Culturing techniques,  Sterile cultures. Culture media,
      Growth media. Sample preparation.

-------
                                                                               2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
    Transactions
 AMIC-9U20
 "BIOTIC CHARACTER AS RELATED TO STREAM KIHERAL COHTEWT", Seel, J. K., Sr.
 of the American Microscopical Society, Vol. 92, No. 3, July 1973, PP
          Nine montane streams In or near deciduous forests In eastern Kentucky and
 western Virginia were studied in relation to those factors involved In the level of
 autotrophlsm and benthos composition present.  Samples of vegetation and macrobenthos
 were collected during each of several collecting trips and the water was analyzed for
 08 (one time), alkalinity, hardness, Ca, MS, inorganic P, ammonia, and nitrite nitrogen.
 Algae and other plants were scraped or pulled from the bottom, nacrobentboe was taken
 with a Surber net from movable materials, subaerged vegetation, and along bank
 overhangs, and naiad clans and crayfish were often picked up or caught by hand.
 Vegetation was preserved and stored in 2-4 percent formaldehyde solutions.  Diatoms
 were later cleaned In acid and mounted In Hyrax.  Macrobenthos was fixed in formalin,
 washed with water, sorted, and stored in alcohol.  Parts for microslldes were cleared
 In Euparol essence and mounted in diaphane.  The streams fell into two distinct classes
 with respect to hardness and alkalinity - five with these values below 30 mgl (Type B
 streams) and four with them exceeding 50 mgl (Type A streams).   B streams contained as
 much or more phosphorus and nitrogen as the A's, but bad no vegetation other than very
 sparse algal growth,  and, with one exception,  lacked molluscs.   Type A streams had
 abundant flowering plants and/or algae at all seasons and well-developed mollusc
 populations.  Benthlc Insects also showed definite A and B characteristics,  although the
 two stream types had  a number of forms in common.  Neither degree of shading nor stream
 size seemed primarily involved in scarcity of plants in B streams.   Allochthonous debris
 was more concentrated In B streams.   In one stream system the biota changed from B to
A In  character with downstream mineral increase.
AHIC-9U22
 "AH AEBOFHILOUS DIATOM COMftJMTIY FROM HOCKING COUNTY, OHIO", Lowe, B. L., Colling,
G. B., Transactions of the American Microscopical Society. Vol. 92, Mo. 3, July 1973,
pp
                            An aerophilous winter diatom community  consisting, of 1*1 taxa was dominated by
                    Meloslra roseana Rabh.,  both in terns of number  of cells and bio-mass.  Scanning
                    electron microscopy revealed details  of M.  roaeana auxospore and vegetative  cells not
                    previously reported.
                    IHDEX TEBK5:  Diatoms, Biological communities, Cjrtological studies, Aquatic habitats.
                         Ecological distribution, Aerobic conditions, Dominant organisms, Winter, Scanning
                         electron microscopy, Sample preparation, Species abundance.
AMC-9U20 (Continued)
Card ZfZ
IHDEX TERM*:  Biological properties, natural streams, Benthos, Aquatic animals. Aquatic
      plants, Ecological distribution, Water quality. Water chemistry, Bottom sampling,
      Water sampling. Aquatic algae, Invertebrates, Systematics, Organic matter,
      Mollusks, Aquatic Insects, Annelids, Crustaceans, Water analysis, Montane streams,
      Mineral content. Sample preservation, Macroinvertebrates, Flatworas.
                    STREPTCCEPHALUS MOOHEI H. SP., A HEW FAIHSf SHRIMP (AHOSTRACA) FROM MEXICO",
                   Belle. P.. Transactions of the American Microscopical Society. Vol. 92, No. 3,
                   July 1973, PP 507-512.

                            More titan 2OO specimens of the genus Streptocepbalus were collected in
                   Chihuahua, Mexico, and fixed in 70 percent ethanol.A few specimens were washed in
                   several changes of distilled water for 2U hr before placing them in 10 percent
                   formalin for 2k hr.  the fairy shrimp were then prepared for study by scanning electron
                   microscopy.  The Anostraca collected were a new species, S.  moorei; the species is
                   fully described and compared with other species already known for the genus.

                   INDEX TERMS:  Crustaceans, Aquatic animals, Systerotics, Speclation,  Invertebrates,
                         Mexico, Fairy ehrlop, Streptocephalus ooorle,  Animal morphology,  Anostraca,
                         Macroinvertebrates, Scanning electron microscopy.  Sample preparation, Sample
                         preservatl on.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-9U2U
   "OBSERVATIONS ON RED COLORED CELLS OF PEBIDIHIUM WISCONSINEMSE EDDY FROM BUCKHORN
  LAKE,  ONTARIO", Nlcholls, K. H., Transactions of the American Microscopical Society.
  Vol. 92, No. 3, July 1973, PP 526T52HT " "'

           Plankton camples taken from Buckhorn Lake, a eutrophlc lake, revealed that
  Perldlnlum visconsinense, widely distributed in the lake, exhibited a red coloration
  vhlch  masked the normal yellowish-brown pigment.  The dimensions of 25 cells were
 I recorded to determine a relationship, if any, between cell size and the red color.  The
  red color  of active cells in the plankton was not related to abnormally large cell size
  as  has been believed for other species of Perldlnium.  Because the red color in active
  cells  appears to be the result of preparation for encystment, it Is suggested that P.
  viscous inense has a cycle of encystment and excystment similar to that of P_. cine turn
  f.  westli.

  INDEX  TERMS:  Dinoflagellates, Color, Life cycles,  Phytoplankton,  Aquatic algae,
         Pyrrophyta,  Canada, Eutrophication, Microscopy, Pollutant identification,  Seston,
         Peridinium visconsinense,  Buckhorn Lake,  Cell size, Flagellates.
 AMIC-9U26
  "TOXICITY BIOASSAY OF HEAVY METALS IN WATER USING TETRAHYMEHA PYRIFORMIS",
 Carter,  J. W.,  Cameron,  I. L., Water Research, Vol. 7, Ho. 77 July 1973,  PP 951-961.

           The toxlcltles  of five heavy metal compounds on the survival of  the ciliated
 protozoan Tetrahymena pyrlformis were determined.  Three-day old cultured cells were
 exposed  to five concentrations of each test compound In one or more of three water
 series;  distilled,  soft,  and hard water.   A culture of each sample was placed in a
 plastic  petrl dish  and covered with mineral oil to prevent evaporation.  The cells were
 counted  initially,  then  again at 0.5 h, 1 h, 2 h, 1 day, 2 days, 3 days,  and on the
 fourth day.  Lethal threshold concentrations and tolerance limit medians  were
 determined by graphic  methods.   On weight bases cadmium was most toxic, followed In
 decreasing toxicity by mercury,  cobalt, zinc, and lead.  Compared to similar fish data,
 all heavy metals were more toxic to T.  pyrlformls except lead.   The toxicity of lead  In
 soft versus hard water exemplified an antagonistic effect with greater than seven times
 the amount of lead necessary  In  hard water to produce comparable mortality  as lead In
 oft water.  On  the other hand,  the toxicity of mercury is about twice as great in hard
water as  In soft water (a synerglstic effect).   T.  pyriforiels appears to  be a more
 enaltlve Indicator than fish of heavy  metal contamination of water.   T.  pyrlfomls
 ioeissay  should  prove  a good means  of determining the existence of many w55e?
pollutants.
IHDEX TERMS:  Blolndicators, Heavy metals, Bloassay,  Toxicity,  Water pollution effects,
      Protozoa,  Cultures, Mercury, Cobalt, Zinc,  Lead,  Cadmium, Water (hardness),  Water
      pollution, Lethal limit, Invertebrates, Tetrahymena pyrlformis, Synergistlc
      effects, Median  tolerance limit, Culture media.
 "THE CONSTRUCTION OF A SAND PROFILE SAMPLER:  ITS USE IN THE STUDY OF THE VORTICELLA
 POPULATIONS AND THE GENERAL INTERSTITIAL MICROFAUNA OF SLOW SAND FILTERS",
 Lloyd, B., Water Research. Vol. 7, No. 7, July 1973, PP 963-973.

          A simple and inexpensive method is described by which the component groups of
 the interstitial fauna can be examined undisturbed by direct microscopy.   The method has
 been developed specifically to locate and enumerate the functional interstitial
 mlcrofauna of slow sand filters used in water purification and it is designed to
 demonstrate the spatial relations of the constituent populations as they  develop In time
 In a flowing system.  Details of construction and methods of operating the sampler
 developed in this study are given.  It has the features of (1)  simple construction  and
 time composed of cheap materials; (2) no mechanical closure device,  thus  no Jamming;  ajid
 (3) the depth distribution of living organisms being examined directly and immediately
 without disturbing the column or subsampling.   The sampler has  been successfully applied
 to monitoring the development of Protozoa and  Rotifera in pilot scale and full  scale
 slow sand filters at the London Metropolitan Water Board's Walton and Ashford Common
 Treatment Works.   Results are presented for the incidence of the general  microfauna and
 for the development,  vertical distribution and effect  of flow rate on the Vorticella
 populations.

 INDEX  TERMS:   Connate water, Aquatic  microorganisms, Fabrication,  Protozoa, Rotifers,
       Annelids, Nemtodes, Ccpepods, Aquatic populations, Sand profile  sampler.
       Sampling equipment. Direct  sampling. Sand filters, Flatworms, Species abundance,
       Vorticella  spp.
AMIC-9U28
"BIODEGRADATION OF UREA IN RIVER WATERS UNDER CONTROLLED LABORATORY CONDITIONS",
Evans, W. H., David, E. J., Patterson, S. J., Water Research,  Vol.  7,  No. 7, July
1973, PP 975-985.

         The blodegradation of urea in river waters has been evaluated under laboratory
conditions.  Urea will degrade to ajnnonla at a rate depending  on the bacterial state of
the river water and on the water temperature.  Under normal conditions no breakdown may
be expected to occur at temperatures below 8 C for I1* days  contact.  In river waters with
a high suspended solids content, simulating extreme winter  river conditions,  « majclmum
breakdown of 3-6 percent dally of the original urea levels  was found for temperatures not
exceeding 8 C during the first 7 days contact.

INDEX TERMS:  Ureas, Blodegradation,  Laboratory tests.  Natural waters.  Degradation  rates,
      Degradation products.

-------
                                                                                2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-9U89
   "CHRONIC EFFECT OF LOW pH ON FATHEAD MINNOW SURVIVAL, GROWTH AND HE PRODUCTION",
   Mount, D. I., Water Research, Vol. 7, No. 7, July 1973, pp 987-993.

           Fathead minnows (Pimephales promelas) were continuously exposed to reduced pH
   levels of U.5, 5.2, 5.9, 6.6 and 7.5 (control) during a 13-month, one-generation test
   In order to measure the effect of such exposure on reproduction and growth of these
   fish.  Since the TL sub 50 to the minnows was close to U.o, two acute tests were
   performed in the same system after the chronic test to determine the lethal pH.
   Survival was not affected, even at the lowest pH tested.   Fish behavior was abnormal,
   and fish were deformed at pH It.5 and 5.2.  Egg production and egg hatchabllity were
   reduced at pH 5.9 and lower, and all eggs were abnormal.   A pH of 6.6 was marginal for
   vital life functions,  but safe for continuous exposure.  Free carbon dioxide,  liberated
  by the addition of sulfuric acid to reduce the pH,  may have had an unknown effect.   The
   fish did not become acclimated to low pH levels.  The TL  sub 50 values in the  acute
  tests were U.05 and U.2.  In one test all fish died in the chamber maintained  between
  pH 3.6 and 3.8,  while  all survived In pH U.5-U.6.   In the other test 20 percent  survived
  pH k.lJi.3 and none died at I+.5.   Since  exact lethal levels were not essential and pH
  control was very difficult,  no further refined testing was done.

  INDEX TERMS:   Hydrogen Ion concentration,  Fish physiology,  Toxielty,  Water pollution
        effects, Bloassay, Growth stages,  Animal growth.  Fish behavior, Fish reproduction,
        Fathead minnow,  Pimephales promelas, Survival, Median tolerance limit,
     v   Teratogenicity.
 AMIC-9U30
 "THE REALITY OF THREE BRITISH BIOTIC INDICES", Sladecek, V., Water Research.
 Vol. 7,  No. 1, July 1973, PP 995-1002.

          In Great Britain three indices are used for classification of streams according
 to benthic  Invertebrates:  the Trent River Board Blotic Index (Woodlwlss, 196U), the
 Lothlans River Purification Board Index (Graham, 1965) and the Score-System (Chandler,
 -970).   All these indices are based in reality on the saproblc system of Kolkwitz and
 fersson  (1902,  1908,  1909) and Its modern developments, mainly the saprobic Index by
Pantle and  Buck (1955)  and the saprobic valency by Zelinka, Marvan and Kubicek (1959).
 •here is no substantial difference among the procedures named and the results are
 omparable  among themselves as pointed out in this paper.   The British Indices deal only
 1th a part of  the whole extent of water quality and are restricted to running waters.

 NDEX TERMS:  Natural streams,  Benthic fauna, Invertebrates, Biolndicators, Aquatic
      Insects, Water quality, Annelids,  Crustaceans,  Mollusks, Growth stages,  Neaatodes,
      Blotic index, Saprobic  index,  »ater mites, Species abundance,  Jfacrolnvertebrates,
      Flatworms.
 'VATER QUALITY CRITERIA FOR EUROPEAN FRESHWATER FISH.  REPORT ON AMMONIA AND INLAND
 FISHERIES", Water Research. Vol. 7, Ho. 7, July 1973, PP 1011-1022.

          The purpose of this review is to summarize the state of knowledge on the effect
 of ammonia on fish, to determine whether firm criteria can be established, and to
 indicate areas where further research Is required.  Data were primarily from European
 sources.  The survey shows that sewage effluent and effluents from certain industries
 and from agriculture are conraon sources of ammonia in water.  Of the parameters
 investigated (pH, C02, DO, hardness, alkalinity, temperature, and salinity), It is
 found that the harmful effects of ammonia on fish were related to the pH value and the
 temperature of the water due to the fact that only the un-lonized fraction of ammonia
 is poisonous.  The un-ionized fraction increases with rising pH value, and with rising
 temperature.  Fish differ slightly in their tolerance to ammonia depending on species.
 The difference in tolerance being more significant for short periods of exposure.   The
 difference In tolerance is, however, not great enough to justify different criteria for
 different species.   The lowest toxic concentration found for salmonlds is 0.2 mg
 NH3/1 (un-ionized),  but other adverse effects caused by prolonged exposure are only
 absent at concentrations lower than 0.025 mg NH3/1 (un-ionized).   Concentrations of tota
 ammonia which contain this amount of un-lonized anmonia vary from 19.6 mg/1 (pH 7.0,
 5  C)  to 0.12 mg/1 (pH 8.5,  30 C).   The criterion should not be applied to temperatures
 below 5 C or to pH values above 8.5 when other factors have to be taken into
 consideration.

 INDEX TERMS:  Hater  quality standards, Ammonia,  Freshwater  fish,  Toxicity,  Water
       temperature, Hydrogen Ion concentration, Water pollution sources.
AMIC-91*36
"EFFECT OF COPPER AND HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM ON THE SPECIFIC GROWTH RATE OF CILIATA
ISOLATED FROM ACTIVATED-SLUDGE", Sudo, P., Alba, £., Water Research, Vol. 7, No. 9,
September 1973, PP 1301-1307.

         Three species of protozoa, Vortlcella mierostoma, Colpidium campylum, and
Operculajla sp., which commonly occur in activated sludge, were cultured in the
presence of copper and hexavalent chromium to determine the effect of these metals on
growth rates.  Alcallgenes faeealls, which was found to be essentially unaffected by
Cu and Cr, was added to mass and monoxenic cultures of protozoa as the sole food source.
Metallic concentrations ranged from 0.05 to 1.6 mg Cu/1 and 0.10 to 51.2 mg Cr/1 which
were added as copper sulfate and potassium dlchromate.  The term IL sub m (median
inhibitory limit) was used to define the metal concentration required to reduce the
specific growth rate of protozoa to one-half of that of a. control.   The IL sub m for
copper was:  0.25 mg/1 (V. mlcrostoma),  0.32 mg/1 (C.  campylum).  and 0.27  mg/1
(Opercularia sp.).  Regarding hexavalent chromium,  IL sub m  for V.  mierostoma,
C. campy 1x57 and Opercularia sp.  were 0.53,  12.9 and 20.2 mg/1, respectively.
Acclimation of each protozoa to  these metals for 96 hr resulted in  IL sub m  enhanced
values of 1.2-2.2 times  as large  as that for the control.

INDEX TERMS:  Protozoa,  Bioassay, Toxiclty,  Copper,  Chromium, Growth  rates, Vorticella
      microotoma,  Colpidium carapylum, Opercularia.
                                                                                        1*0

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  MCC-9U39
   "STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF BIOLOGICAL DATA FROM PREOPESATIONAL-POSTOPEBATI01IAL
   INDUSTRIAL WATEP QUALITY MONITORING", Jensen, A. L., Water Research, Vol. 7, So. 9,
  September 1973, PP 1331-13>t7.

            Trends in data on aquatic populations can be assessed using simple statistical
  methods and plotting results on control charts.  The procedure was developed
  specifically to monitor the effects of Industrial water, e.g. from power plants, on
  water quality based  upon preoperational and postoperational data.  Since many
  conditions cause changes in populations, the control charts are constructed with action
  limits which specify normal deviations of data.  A statistical method is given to
  eliminate seasonal fluctuations in data.  When data fall outside the action limits, a
  disturbance in the system  is suspected.  Since sampling of bottom fauna on the basis
  of transects in statistically unsound, a procedure of stratified sampling was developed
  for calculating statistical values on the basis of subpopulations.  Use of the
  procedure is demonstrated with data from Browns Ferry Nuclear Power Plant which is being
  constructed by TVA on Wheeler Reservoir in northern Alabama.  It Is shown that stream
  monitoring can detect only  relatively large changes that occur in aquatic populations.

  IHDEX  TERMS:  Monitoring.,  Water pollution effects,  Aquatic populations,  Statistical
        methods, Control charts,  Data Interpretation.
 AMIC-9W»0
  'BOTTOM FAUNA CHANGES DURING ARTIFICIAL RESERVOIR DESTRATIFICATION", Lackey,  R.  T.,
 Hater Research.  Vol.  7,  No.  9,  September 1973,  PP 131*9-1356.
          Parvin Lake,  Colorado,  a 19 ha mesotrophic reservoir with mnxlimiin depth of 10
 m and mean depth of k.k m,  was studied to evaluate the effects of thermal
 destratification (aeration) on bottom fauna.   Identical sampling programs were carried
 out during a control year (Nov 1968-Oct 1969)  and a treatment year (Hov 1969-Oct 1970).
 Samples were collected with an Ekman dredge, sieved through a wash bucket and the
 organisms separated  by sugar flotation and rose ben^.1 dyeing.  Sampling sites (U)  were
 selected on the basis  of  previous studies, preliminary sampling, and depth.  Four
 macrobenthlc species were abundant during the  study:  Asellus intermedlus (isopod),
 ;haoborus sp.  (phantom midge), Hyalella azteca (amphlpod),  and Lumbrlculus ineonstans
                                "hironomidae were present and treated collectively.
 annelid).   Several species of
  •alella significantly Increased  in abundance  in shallow water during destratification
  ironomld  larvae declined in abundance In the profundal zone during destratification
 n Winter and Summer.   Asellus. Chaoborus, and Lumbrieulus were not significantly
 Itered  in abundance during destratification.

INDEX TERMS:  Benthic fauna, Aquatic populations, Aeration,  Destratification,  Midges,
      Isopods, Amphipoda,  Annelids, Diptera.
 "Alf INTRODUCTION TO THE PKYTOPLAKKTON, PRIMARY PRODUCTION AND RELEVANT HYDROGRAPHY
 OF LOCH ETIVE", Wood, B. J. B., Tett,  P. B.,  Edvards, A., Journal of Ecology.
 Vol. 61, No. 2, July 1973, PP 569-585.                    	

          Primary productivity was measured in Loch Etive for the purpose of estimating
 the contribution of phytoplankton to the carbon cycle.  The meteorology and hydrography
 were also assessed.  Phytoplankton was collected at various depths in plastic  water
 bottles, filtered, pigment extracted,  and chlorophyll and ptin measured by
 fluorescence.  Phytoplankton was identified and counted under the microscope.   Primary
 production was measured by the C-lU method.  The loch has a large catchment area,  and
 inflowing freshwater reduces average salinity.  Analysis of currents in terms  of a
 two-layer system shows that separation of the deep (salty landwards flowing) and surface
 (brackish,  seawards flowing) layers proceeds  at 6-8 km/day.   The upper 10 m of the water
 column corresponds approximately to the brackish and the euphotic zone.   Standing  crop
 in this zone of the lower loch ranged  from about 7 to about 250 mg C/cu m based on
 pigment measurements.  Skeletonema eostatum was the dominant phytoplankter but small     j
 flagellates were also Important.   About 70 g  C/sq m/yr is a  rough estimate of  gross     •
 annual primary production in the  euphotic zone of the lower  basin.   A  number of factors  j
 qualify this value,  most important being difficulties in measuring CO2 concentrations,
 and day-to-day fluctuations in light intensity.   Light is considered to be the most
 important limiting factor in the  loch,  and the effects of the  wet west highland climate
 dominate the ecology of the phytoplankton.
 INDEX  TERMS:   Blonass,  Phytoplankton,  Primary  productivity,  Carbon cycle,  Diatoms,
       Dominant organisms.  Light intensity.
AMIC-9475
"TflE RELATIONSHIP OF ENZYME KINETIC HETEROTROPHY ANALYSIS TO OTHER EUTHOPHICATIOK
INDICES", Koob, D. D., Utah State University, Utah Agricultural Experiment Station,
Logan, Utah, Research Report No. 11, June 1973, lU pp.  NTIS Report No. PB-221 S'K).

         Three locations In Bear Lake, an ultraoligotrophic like on the Utah-Idaho
border, were sampled for five eutrophication indicators - primary productivity, total
bacterial concentrations, coliform concentrations, V sub t values, and dark uptake
rates for inorganic carbon.  In general, samples from the northern and central water
gyres of the lake were similar, but different from samples from the southern gyre.   No
numerically significant correlations were found between any two of the parameters tested,
although similar weekly patterns of change were noted for dark  uptake  of inorganic
carbon and V sub t values at two of the locations.  Hi^iest rates  of carbon fixation
(both photosynthetic and non-photosynthetic)  and of organic carbon uptake  occurred
at the location nearest concentrated human occupation.   High values for coliform
counts, V sub t values, and primary productivity occurred during periods of high
tourist activity.   A stimulatory influence of Swan Cree   Inflow  on prinery  productivity
was Indicated.

INDEX TERMS:  Water analysis, Oligotrophy,  Trophic level, Bear Lake, Enzyme kinetic
      heterotrophy,  Eutrophication  index.

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  "BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS OF LAKE WINGRA", Koonce, J. F., Teraguchi, M., Baumann, P. C.,
  et  a.1.,  University or Wisconsin, Laboratory at Limnology, Midlson, Wlscoaflln, Report
  Mo.  EPA-R3-73-OUU, August 1973, 118 pp,

           An investigation of seasonal changes in species diversity and biomaas of
  phytoplankton, zooplsnkton, benthos, and fish In Lake Wingra, Sbdlson, Wisconsin, was
  conducted during  1970 and 1971.  The objective of this study was to obtain ecological
!  data on  the biological components of an aquatic ecosystem and to utilize these data
I  along with concurrent chemical data to aid the development of systems models of nutrient
j  and energy fluxes in lake drainage basins.  Interpretations of data gathered during this
  study reveal several important considerations for models of lake systems «"^ future
  studies  of Lake Wingra.  Phytoplankton associations, for example, appear to tie adaptive,
  self -organizing systems.  Such behavior suggests the possibility to apply optimization
  principles to phytoplankton models.  The data suggest, furthermore, that optimization
  analysis  can be based on size particle distributions of the phytoplankton, which, rather
  than species, appears to be the basis of phytoplankton categories.  Zooplankton and
  benthos analyses, on the other hand, indicate that energy and nutrient fluxes my be
  adequately approximted by simulating only a few species.  Finally, results of fish
  studies imply that models of whole lake ecosystems must account for the mobility of
 predators in estimating their impact on prey populations, which should be characterized
 by differing spatial and temporal susceptibility to predatlon.

 INDEX TERMS:   Phytoplankton,  Zooplankton,  Benthos,  Freshwater fish, Biology,  Blomass,
       Cycling nutrients,  tnergy budget,  rfodel studies. Ecological distribution,  Primary
       productivity,  BlorhtW.s,  Standing crops,  Fish food organisms, water chefolstry,
                                                            easonal variation,  Species
                                                                   sources.
                                                                                           THE BIOLOGY OF JLUE-GREEH ALGAE, Carr, If. G., Whitton, B. A. (Editors), Botanical
                                                                                           Monographs, VolT 9, Blaekwell Scientific Publications, London, England, 1972, 676 pp.
                   ,          .,               ,
       Dominant orranisms,  Energy conversion.  Lake Wingra,  Seasonal
       diversity,  Species abundance,  seasonal  succession, Nutrient s
 'BIOLOGICAL FIELD ADD LABORATORY METHODS FOR mSURING THE  QUALITY OF SURFACE WATERS
AND EFFLUENTS", Weber,  C.  I.  (Ed.),  U.  S. Environmental Protection Agency, Analytical
Quality Control Laboratory, Cincinnati,  Ohio, Report No. EPA-670/U-73-001, July 1973,
187 PP.

         This manual  contelos biological methods selected by a  committee of biologists
for use In routine field and  laboratory works in fresh and  marine waters during
short-term enforcement  studies,  water quality trend monitoring,  effluent testing and
-eseareh projects.  These methods are considered to be the  best that are presently
ivailable.

INDEX  TERMS:  Analytical techniques,  Water quality, Monitoring,  Methodology, Plankton,
      On-site tests, Laboratory  tests.  Pollutant identification, Periphyton, Aquatic
      life,  Fish,  Toxlcity, Aquatic plants,  Phytoplankton,  Zooplankton, Biomass, Chemical
      analysis,  Aquatic algae, Aquatic bacteria, Rotifers,  Protozoa, Crustaceans,
      Standing crops,  Bioassay, Bibliographies, Biolndicators,  Model studies. Resistance,
      Aquatic insects. Invertebrates, Annelids, Mollusks, Water pollution effects,
      Fishing AniBB.1  physiology, Plant physiology, Data interpretation, Macrolnvert*-
      brates, Biometrics,  Sampling techniques, Sample  preparation, Quantitative analysis,
      Sample  preservation.
                                                                                                    This volume gives an account of most aspects of blue-green «ipii biology that
                                                                                           are of general interest, or are currently the subject of particularly marked activity.
                                                                                           Scoe of the topics are:  'Synthesis of Metabolic Intermediates' - A.J. Smith;
                                                                                            'Metabolic Control and Autotrophic Physiology1 - N.G. Carr; ' Photosynthetic Reactions
                                                                                           and Components of Thy lako ids' - D.W. Krognann; 'Fine Structure and Chemical
                                                                                           Composition of the Cell Envelopes' - G. Drews; 'Cytochemical Examination1 - G.W. Funs;
                                                                                            •Lipid Composition and Metabolism1 - B.W. Nichols; 'Biliprotelns and Bile Pigments' -
                                                                                           D.J. Chapman; 'Mutagenesls and Genetic Recombination1 - C. Van Baalen; 'Phyeoriruses' -
                                                                                           R.S. Saffertnon; 'The Heterocyst1 - P. Fay; Nitrogen Fixation1 - w.D.P. Stewart; 'Gas
                                                                                           Vacuoles' - A.E. Walobyj 'Freshwater Plankton1 - B.A. Whitton; 'Physiology and Ecology
                                                                                           of terine Blue-Green Ai^e1 - G. E. Fogg; "Ecology of Blue-Green Algae in Hot Springs'  -
                                                                                           R.W. Castenholz; "Interactions with Other Organisms' - B.A.  Vhltton; "The
                                                                                           Relationship between Blue-Green Algae and Carbonate Deposits'  - S.  Golubic; 'Status of
                                                                                           Classical Taxoncmy1 - T.V. Desikachary; 'Evolutionary and Ecological Aspects of the
                                                                                           Cyanophytes' - T.D. Brock; 'Autotrophy and Heterotrophy in Unicellular Blue-Green
                                                                                           Algae1 - R.Y. Stanier; 'Culture Collections'  - J.  Komarek; 'Notes of Isolation and
                                                                                           Laboratory Culture' - H.G. Carr, J. Komarek,  B.A.  Whitton; 'Continuous Culture of
                                                                                           Filamentous Blue-Green Al^.e'  - J.  Thomas;  'Mass Cultivation of Anacystis nldulans' -
                                                                                           F. Juttner.
                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:   Cytologlcal studies,  Phytoplankton,  Aquatic algae,  Cyanophyta,  Marine
                                                                                                 algae,  Ecology,  Soil algae, Nuisance  algse,  Biology, Chemical composition.
                                                                                           "THEORETICAL EFFECTS OF ARTIFICIAL DESTRATIFICATION ON ALGAL FROBUCTICW  IN
                                                                                           IMPOUHDjeNTS", Lorenzen, M,, Mitchell, R., Environmental Science and Technology,
                                                                                           vol. 7, Ho. 10, October 1973, pp 939-9^.

                                                                                                   Artificial mixing is an important tool in the management of eutrophic lakes
                                                                                           and reservoirs.  Theoretical models of phytoplankton production are briefly reviewed
                                                                                           and a model for application to mixed impoundments is derived.  The model considers both
                                                                                           nutrient depletion and the balance between photosynthesis and respiration %s potential
                                                                                           hiooiasa limiting factors.  The results of model calculations show that nutrient limited
                                                                                           blcnass Is directly proportional to the depth of mixing, vhereas light-limited peak
                                                                                           bionass decreases linearly with increased depth of mixing.   It is believed that in
                                                                                           Impoundment* where artificial destratlflcation is a successful control technique,
                                                                                           nutrient limited algal blooms are replaced by light-limited blooms of smaller
                                                                                           magnitude.  The most important variables are the depth available for mixing and the
                                                                                           attenuation of light in the water column.

                                                                                           INDEX T£RK5:  Destratlflcation,  Impoundments,  Primary  productivity.  Effects, Limiting
                                                                                                factors, Eutrophication, Depth,  Model studies, Nutrient  depletion,  Artificial
                                                                                                mixing.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-9520
 "CARBON DIOXIDE AHD PH:  EFFECT ON SPECIES SUCCESSION OF ALGAE", Goldman, J. C.,
 Shapiro, J., Science. Vol. 182, No. 1*109, October 19, 1973, PP 306-307.

         Arguments are presented to refute Shapiro's hypothesis (see AMIC-6551)
 that predominance of blue-green algae results from a lowering of aqueous C02
 concentration as the pH rises In natural waters.  Three objections are presented!
 (1) that algal growth is not controlled by free C02 concentrations, (2) that the pH can
 affect the availability of nutrients other than CO2, and (3) that the result of changing
 the pH may be through its effects on algal enzymes that may be involved in nutrients
 transport.  Shapiro's responses to these objections are also presented.

 INDEX TERMS:  Limiting factors,  Dominant organisms, Carbon dioxide, Hydrogen ion
      concentration, Succession.
 AMIC-9525
  "ACUTE TOXICITY OF BERYLLIUM SULFATE TO THE COMMON GUPPY",  Slonim,  A.  R.,  Jounal
 Water Pollution Control Federation.  Vol.  1*5,  Ho.  10,  October 1973,  pp  2110-2122.
          The  acute  toxlcity of beryllium sulfate solutions to gupples was determined
 in five static bioassays.   Other bioassays  evaluated those factors  that may affect the
 median tolerance limits  such as the  fish age,  increase  of pH,  and previous exposure to
 beryllium.  Some preliminary radloberyllium studies  on  Be uptake  in guppies are
 presented to gain some Insight into  the  mechanism of Be toxlcity.   The 96-hour
 median tolerance limit was  20.3 ng/1 in  hard water and  0.19 mg/1  in soft  water.  Acute
 toxiclty was independent of fish age but reduced to  seme extent by  buffering the
 solutions.   Proper preexposure conditioning significantly Increased the tolerance of
 gupples to very toxic concentrations.  Radio-beryllium  data on exposed fish and some
 .ndirldual  organs,  as well  as  on the effects of  various factors on  beryllium uptake,
 were  reviewed  in conjunction with the toxicity data.  These results indicate that the
 .oxicity and lethality may not depend on  the amount  of  beryllium concentrated within
 ;he fish, but  more  likely on the  effect on a particular target organ or cellular or
subcellular  component.

INDEX TERMS:   Toxlcity, Beryllium, Bioassay, Water pollution effects,  Age,  Absorption,
      Environmental  effects, Water chemistry, Guppy, Median tolerance limit,
      Bloaccumulatlon, Lebistes reticulatus, Beryllium  sulfate, Beryllium radiolsotopes,
      Data interpretation.
                                                                                            AMTCJ9587
                                                                                             "ERECTS OF RESIDUAL CHLORUE OH AQUATIC LITE", BrungS, W. A., Journal Water Pollution
                                                                                            Control Federation. Vol. 1*5, Mo. 10, October 1973, PP 2180-21931	

                                                                                                     Increased use  of chlorine and recent studies of residual chlorine toxiclty in
                                                                                            aquatic systems have emphasized the need for close scrutiny of present disinfection
                                                                                            procedures.  This review discusses chlorine uses and chlorine chemistry and
                                                                                            emphasizes toxiclty studies In the field and in the laboratory.  Interim criteria,
                                                                                            based on knowledge to date, for permissible concentrations of total residual chlorine
                                                                                            are:  (1) in areas receiving wastes treated continuously with chlorine, not to exceed
                                                                                            0.01 mg/1 for the protection of more resistant organisms only, or not to exceed 0.002
                                                                                            mg/1 for the protection of most aquatic organisms; and (2) in areas receiving
                                                                                            intermittently chlorinated wastes, not to exceed 0.2 mg/1 for a period of 2 hr/day for
                                                                                            more resistant species of fish, or not exceed -O.OU mg/1 for a period of 2 hr/day for
                                                                                            trout and salmon.   If free chlorine persists,  more restrictive criteria are warranted.
                                                                                            Alternate procedures or substitutes for chlorination should be investigated.

                                                                                            INDEX TERMS:   Aquatic life,  Water pollution effects.  Industrial wastes.  Pollutant
                                                                                                  identification,  Waste water (pollution),  Municipal wastes,  Toxicity,  Aquatic
                                                                                                  animals,  On-slte tests.  Laboratory  tests,  Chlorination,  Methodology,  Lethal
                                                                                                  limit,  Mortality,  Waste  water treatment,  Effluents,  Marine  animals,  J-brine
                                                                                                  plants,  Persistence, Aquatic  plants,  Chlorine residual,  Species diversity,
                                                                                                  Dechlorlnatlon.
                                                                                         A MIC-9529
                                                                                         "TOTAL DISSOLVED ELECTROLYTE EFFECTS ON PtRIPHYTCN", Dickman, M., Journal Water
                                                                                         Pollution Control Federation. Vol. 45, No. 10, October 1973,  pp 2211-2215.	
                                                                                                  Periphyton are good pollution indicators because they,  unlike many fish and
                                                                                         bottom fauna, cannot leave an area during severe pollution *.nd return after conditions
                                                                                         have improved.  A study was made of the periphyton above and below a sulflte pulp and
                                                                                         paper mill, and continuous conductivity monitoring supplemented  the data  collected on
                                                                                         pH, temperature, alkalinity, oxygen,  and turbidity.   Results shoved no significant
                                                                                         differences in any of the water chemistry parameters above or below the pulp mill.
                                                                                         The continuous monitoring, however, revealed peak values for conductivity belov  the
                                                                                         mill that were not duplicated above the mill.  The peaks indicated  a change  In one or
                                                                                         more of the parameters that could not be found using random sampling techniques.

                                                                                         IHDEX TERMS:  Periphyton,  Electrolytes,  Dissolved solids, Water polluticn effects,
                                                                                               Liquid wastes,  Pulp  wastes,  Sessile algae,  Water chemistry, Bioindlcatore
                                                                                               Monitoring,  Protozoa,  Salts, Data  interpretation.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICXL METHODS
AMIC-9530
 "ENVIHONNENTAL CONTROL OF PHYTOPIANKTUN CELL SIZE", Parsons, T. R., Takahashi, M.,
 Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, No. U, July 1973, PP 511-515.

         On  the basis of ecological and physiological data, those determinate factors
 contributing to phytoplankton cell size are the: (1) rate of nitrate or ammonia input
 to  the cell, (2) extinction coefficient of the water, (3) mixed layer depth, (U) light
 intensity, (5) sinking rate of phytoplankton, and (6) upwelllng velocity of the water.
 Two different sized species of phytoplankton, the large Dltylum brlgtatwellii and the
 small Coccollthus huxleyi, were used to demonstrate this phenomenon mathematically.
 From the results obtained it was apparent that the growth rates for C, huxleyi are
 higher than  those for D. brightwellii In areas which are known to be~predcmlnated by
 small-celled phytoplankton (e.g. stable subtropical seas such as the Sargasso Sea and
 temperate waters such as the subarctic Pacific).  On the other hand the larger
phytoplankton species shows a higher growth rate in areas of tropical and antarctic
upwelllng as well as in coastal environments; this also is in general agreement with
current observations.

INDEX TERMS:  Phytoplankton,  Environmental effects,  Physiological ecology.  Plant growth,
      Growth rates,  Limiting factors,  Marine  algae,  Cell size.
 AMIC-9531
 "IMFLUENCE OF HUMIC SUBSTANCES ON THE GROWTH OF MARINE PHYTOPLANKTON:  DIATOhE",
 Prakssh,  A.,  fiashid,  M.  A.,  Jensen,  A.,  et al.,  Limnology and Oceanography,
 Vol.  18,  No.  *S  July  1973,  pp 516-521*.

           Humlc compounds Isolated from brownish water of a mangrove swamp and from Fucus
 veslculoaus and  Laminaria digitata were  studied in relation to their Influence on the
 jrowth of axenlc aixl  nonaxenic marine diatom cultures.  Growth was measured by
 estimation of  cell numbers and volumes at frequent intervals In a Coulter counter
 equipped with a volume converter.  Responses to  humic additives were determined by
 exposing the cultures to  1 Or 5 microCi  of activity Of C-lU added as C-lU-Na2HC03 and
 ncubatlng them at 10 C and U klux light intensity for 2-k hr.   The activity  was
measured with a thin-window gas-flow counter.  Chlorophyll a content was  also measured.
 he  humic and fulvic iclds extracted from decomposed residues of the two  littoral
marine algae and  from mangrove  leachates,  stimulated the growth of a number of marine
 latoms.   This stimulatory effect  was dependent  on the concentration as well  as the
molecular size of the humic additive.  Low molecular size fractions at  low
 oncentrations generated the maximum growth responses,  as evidenced by  increased  cell
 ield,  growth  rate,  chlorophyll concentration, and radiocarbon assimilation.

 NDEX TERMS:   Humic  acids, Fulvic acids,  Diatoms, Growth rates.  Water pollution,
      Laboratory  tests,  Phaeophyta., Plant growth,  Mangrove swamps.  Cell volume.
      Chlorophyll a, Culture  media, Sample preparation.
                                                                                            AMIC-9532
                                                                                             "FBfTONEUETON ECOLOGY OF A TEMPERABE MARINE LAGOON", Hardy, J. T., Limnology and
                                                                                            Oceanography. Vol. 18, No. k, July 1973, PP 525-533-

                                                                                                     Comparison of neuston (upper OA cm) and plankton (10 cm deep) water samples
                                                                                             frcm a. temperate marine lagoon and an adjacent, less sheltered bay Indicates that:  (l)
                                                                                             the surface microlayer exhibits greater and more rapid environmental fluctuations than
                                                                                             the subsurface water; (2) no abundant phytoneuston populations develop outside the
                                                                                            lagoon;  (3) in the main lagoon fairly abundant phytoneuston populations develop; (U)
                                                                                            phytoneuston populations are most developed in the shallow sheltered pond area of the
                                                                                            lagoon, particularly in summer; (5) taxonomic diversity is generally lower and donlnanci
                                                                                            greater  In well-developed phytoneuston populations than in underlying phytoplankton
                                                                                            populations; (6) photosynthetic assimilation ratios are greater in phytoneuston than in
                                                                                            phytoplankton populations.  (Reprinted from Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, No. k,
                                                                                            July 1973, PP 525-533.  Copyright 1973 by the American Society of "Limnology and
                                                                                            Oceanography,  Inc.  Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)

                                                                                            INDEX TERMS:  Lagoons, Temperate,  Ecology,  Phytoplankton,  Bays,  Dominant organisms,
                                                                                                  Primary productivity, Standing crops,  Biological communities,  Protozoa, Marine
                                                                                                  algae, Marine environment,  Phytoneuston,  Sample preservation.  Sample preparation,
                                                                                                  Species diversity,  Species abundance,  Sllicoflagellate3.
                                                                                          AMIC-9533
                                                                                          "A STUDY OF PLANKTON DYNAMICS AND NUTRIENT CYCLING IN THE CENTRAL GYRE OF THE
                                                                                          NOROH PACIFIC OCEAN", Eppley, R. W., Renger,  E.  H.,  Venrick,  E.  L.,  et al.,
                                                                                          Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 18, No. U, July 1973f  PP 53^-551.

                                                                                                   The dynamics of phytoplankton growth in relation to  nutrient concentrations
                                                                                          were studied in the subtropical central gyre  of  the  North Pacific in November 1971.
                                                                                          Rates of excretion of phosphate, ammonium,  and urea-N by zooplankton and rates of
                                                                                          assimilation of carbon, nitrate, ammonium,  and urea-N by phytoplankton were measured.
                                                                                          The growth rate of phytoplankton was estimated to be about 0.2-0.3 doublings/day  in  the
                                                                                          70-80-JB mixed layer, apparently limited by  concentrations of  both nitrogen and
                                                                                          phosphate.  Only nitrogen concentration was so limiting at a  station near the western
                                                                                          edge of the California Current.  No diel changes in  concentrations of ambient nutrients
                                                                                          were observed.   Urea-nitrogen appears to be an important source  of nitrogen for
                                                                                          phytoplankton growth in these waters and to be an important excretory product  of
                                                                                          zooplankton. Concentrations of phosphate and ammonium  were extremely low,  but turnover
                                                                                          tines were estimated to be of the order 3-5 days for ammonium and greater than 10 days
                                                                                          for urea and phosphate.  Blomass of phytoplankton in the mixed layer  was  also  very low,
                                                                                          and corresponded approximately to that expected  if a laboratory  culture were operated
                                                                                          as a nitrogen-limited ohemostat with a concentration of about O.U8 microgratt-atom
                                                                                          N/llter in the  incoming culture medium and  a  dilution rate of about 0.13 per day.
                                                                                          Physiological differences were noted between  the phytoplankton in the mixed layer and
                                                                                          that living below the thermocllne,  B.S were  differences  in chemical composition (ratio of
                                                                                          CiChl a and C;N).   (Reprinted from Limnology  and Oceanography, Vol. 18, No. U, July 1973,
                                                                                          PP 53"*~551.   Copyright 1973 by the American Soceity of Limnology and Oceanography, Inc.
                                                                                          Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-9533 (Continued)
                                                                         Card 2/2
  INDEX TERMS:  Cycling nutrients, Zooplankton, Phytoplankton, Growth rates, Limiting
        factors, Pacific Ocean, Photosynthesis, Mlxollonlon, Phosphates, Nitrogen, Bl
        Water pollution, Water analysis, Vitamins, Trace elements, Carbon, Excretion
        rates, Assimilation rates, Data Interpretation, Chemical composition.
  AMIC-9531*
  "REGRESSIONS BETWEEN BIOLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHIC JffiASUHEMSTE IS THE EASTERN
  TROPICAL PACIFIC AMD THEIR SIGNIFICANCE TO ECOLOGICAL EFFICIENCY", Blackburn, M.,
  Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 18,  Bo. U,  July 1973, pp 552-563.
          Simple  regressions of various standing stocks on each other and on primary
 productivity were compared by covariance analysis  for different seasons,  latitudes, and
 longitudes in the eastern tropical Pacific.  The stock of zooplankton varies
 significantly with that  of chlorophyll a to  a  power less than 1.0 In all seasons and
 areas, and It is shown that a similar relation probably exists between the
 corresponding rates of dally production.  A  similar relation holds In the regression
 of standing stock of fish-cephalopod  micronekton,  suitably lagged,  on stock of
 zooplankton.   Thus the relative amount of organic  matter transferred from one trophic
 level to another probably decreases with an  Increase of stock and production at the
 lower level  so that ecological efficiency is  higher in oligotrophic than In eutrophic
 situations, In tropical oceans.  Standing stock of chlorophyll a varies  significantly
 with primary  productivity to  a power  less than 1.0.  The stock of crustacean
micronekton sometimes varies  with  the stock  of chlorophyll a to a power  greater than
 10   which  is  Interpreted as  a feeding aggregation.  (Reprinted from Limnology and
Oceanography.  Vol. ^8,  No. U. July 1973,  PP  552-?63.   Copyright 1973 by  thelmerlcan
g^y^ffrmnology  and Oceanography,  Inc.  Reprinted by permission of  the
copyright owner. )
TNDEX TERMS'
              Pacific  Ocean,  Standing crops. Primary productivity, Regression analysis,
                 properties  Tropical regions, Zooplankton, Temporal distribution,
                            ' Chlorophyll I, Ecological distribution,  Latitudinal studies.
AfflC-9535
tRAZDK OF PSEUDCCAIANUS HDKTHB 0V NATURALLY OCCURRING PARTICULAR MATTER",
Poulet, S. A.. Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, Ho. U, July 1973, PP 56**-573-

         The quantity and size of particulate natter consumed by Pse"^<^~«'''>nua nlnutus
were studied In seawater samples collected fnan different depths and from closely
spaced stations.  The heterogeneity In particle distribution resulted from quantitative
and qualitative fluctuations In the particle spectrum, although at times the total
concentration was about the same.  Pseudocalanus minutus consumed particles between b
and 1OO microns.  An electlvity Index value was more often positive for 25.^-57.0-mieron
particles.  On the average, particles less than 39 microns were more readily eaten than
larger particles.  The consumption by copepods at different locations was related not
only to particle concentration but also to the pattern of the particle size spectrum.
PseudoM''l°'T'A" was able to shift its grazing pressure from amnii to large particles to
compensate for a reduction In density of snail particles.  (Reprinted from Limnology
and Oceanography. Vol. 18, No. U, July 1973, PP 56U-573.  Copyright 1973 by the
American Society of Limnology and Oceanography, Inc.  Reprinted by permission of the
copyright owner.)

INDEX TERMS:  Grazing, Food habits, Laboratory tests.  Particle size,  Selectivity,
      Browse utilization,  Partlculate matter,  Pseudocalanus minutus,  Bedford Basin,
      Vertical distribution,  Particle concentration.
                                                                                             A NEW M5THOD FOR THE ESTDttTION OF ABSOLUTE MCROFOSSIL NUMBERS, WITH REFERENCE
                                                                                            ESPECIALLY TO DIATOMS",  Battarbee,  R. W., Limnology and Oceanography, Vol.  18,
                                                                                            Ho. U, July 1973, PP W-653.

                                                                                                    Random distribution of diatoms for estimation of absolute mlcrofossll
                                                                                            numbers  can be obtained  using  an evaporation tray with depressions to hold  four cover
                                                                                            slips.  A  measured quantity of well mixed suspension Is added to the tray and allowed
                                                                                            to evaporate without disturbance.   The cover slips can then be removed or the samples
                                                                                            mounted  directly by Inverting  a slide with mountant on the cover slips.  Statistical
                                                                                            analyses of randomness and variance showed that the technique is statistically reliable.
                                                                                            Procedures are given for utilizing  these data In combination with data on water content,
                                                                                            sediment density, and deposition rate to produce meaningful results.  Data obtained
                                                                                            for Lough  Neagh,  Northern  Ireland suggest a relationship between Increasing total
                                                                                            diatom deposition,  increasing  Importance of alkallbiontlc species in fossil diatom
                                                                                            communities,  and the possible progress of eutrophlcatlon.

                                                                                            INDEX  TERMS:   Diatoms, Cytologies!  studies, Sample preparation, Counting.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
"A PORTABLE APPARATUS FOR MEASURING RELATIVE GAS VACUOLATIOH, THE STREHGTH OF
GAS VACUQLES, AND TURGOR PRESSURE IN PLANKTOHIC BIKE-GREEN ALGAE AMD BACTERIA",
Walsby, A. E., Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, Ho. U, July 1973, PP 653-658.

         An apparatus developed to measure gas vacuolatlon, strength of 0ts vacuoles,
and cell turgor pressure in blue-green algae and bacteria is based on the finding that
a quasi-quantitative estimate of gas vacuoles can be obtained from the decrease In
turbidity when gas vacuoles are collapsed by application of pressure.  The apparatus
comprises three main parts:  a cylinder of compressed gaa connected to a gas inlet
system with a gauge to monitor the pressure, which is connected to a pressure-resistant
glass  nephelometer tube housed in a nephelcmeter; and a battery-powered millivolt meter
with amplifier, monitoring the output of the nephelometer photocell.  Readings are made
by admitting gas In steps of 50 kN/sq. m to a final pressure of l.U MR/sq m and recording
turbidity at each step.  Cell turgor pressure is determined with a second sample
containing sucrose solution at a concentration of 0.5 M.  The pressure required to
collapse the vacuoles Is equal to the cell turgor pressure.  The relative degree of gas
vacuolatlon can be estimated from the ratio delta T sub a to T sub c, where delta T sub
a is the change In turbidity when all vacuoles are collapsed and T sub c is the turbidity
due to the cells remaining after collapsing nil gas vacuoles.  The equipment Is
portable and costs about 560 dollars for parts.
INDEX TERMS:  Cyanophyta,
      pressure.
Mechanical equipment, Bacteria, Gaa vacuolatlon, Turgor
 AMC-95W*
  "PATTERNS OF RADIOCARBON UPTAKE BY A THERHDPHILIC BLUE-GREEK ALGA UNDER VARYING
 CONDITIONS OF IMCUBATIOB", Sperling, J. A., Hale, G.  M.,  Limnology and Oceanography.
 Vol.  18,  Ho.  U,  July 1973, PP 658-662.

           In vitro and fast (Uo cm/sec), and alow (1-3 cm/sec) flow in situ methods of
 sampling  vere compared by measuring the primary productivity of tfaatlgocladus
 laminosufl Cohn using each procedure.  Current effect  and the mechanics of in vitro
 Incubation were distinguished by comparing the distributions of radioactivity  within
 the cores.  Thick (lf.5-^.6 mm) and thin (10-1.5 «m) mats  were grown on styrofoam In
 aquaria and transferred to a  laboratory stream model  fox in situ tests.   For In vitro
 tests  samples were  taken with a steel cork borer, placed In 20-*1 screwcap vials,
 and the vials placed In the stream model.   C-lU-labeled HaHC03 was Introduced  into
 the stream and samples  taken  for radioactivity counts after 3 and 9 hours.   The data
 sujwest that the  in  vitro technique for determining radiocarbon primary productivity
 ofthermophillc algae that form gelatinous mats In Justified, whether the cores be
 thick or thin, when  the core  is composed entirely of  algae free from bacteria  or
 substratum.   Under these  conditions the total uptake  of In vitro Incubation* approaches
 that  of in situ incubations.   Where cores  are bounded by  bacteria or substratum,
 estimates  of primary productivity may  by underrated by the In vitro technique.

INDEX TERMS:   Bloassay, Primary productivity,  On-slte tests,  Cyanophyta, In vitro tests,
      Mastlgocladus lamlnosus.
                                                                                            "DECOMPOSITION OF MAMIE COPEFODS", Harding, G. C.  H.,  Limnology and Oceanography.
                                                                                            Vol. 18, Ho. k, July 1973, PP 670-673.                          	

                                                                                                     AH the first step in establishing the proportion of net damaged to dead
                                                                                            cppepods In plankton tows, experiments were conducted to Investigate the rate of
                                                                                            decomposition of dead animals.  Sauries of Calanus flnmarchlcus, which had been
                                                                                            killed by suffocation, were sealed In 30-ml vials containing Halifax water at 1* C or
                                                                                            Sargasso Sea surface water at 22 C.  Additional tests were conducted In which
                                                                                            Calanus were sterilized by guma radiation or autoclaving.  The irradiated Calanus
                                                                                            were also incubated at 20-22 C in. seawater filtered through a 0.22-micron filter.
                                                                                            One vial of each series was opened at 21* hour intervals,  until decomposition and the
                                                                                            carcasses stained for bacteria with carbol thlonln.   The material was stained on a
                                                                                            O.U5-micron filter which was later mounted in Permount  on a glass slide.  Rod-shaped
                                                                                            bacteria decomposed dead Culnnus within 11 days in k C  Halifax water and within 3
                                                                                            days in 22 C Sargasso Sea water.  In both cases Initial infection occurred  on the
                                                                                            exoakeleton and apparently progressed into the organisms  through the mouth.   The
                                                                                            urosome and internal extremities were the last to be attacked.   Samples in  filtered
                                                                                            seawater were covered with small coccoid bacteria after k<) days,  but copepod tissues
                                                                                            were »n  distinguishable.   Collection of surface corpses  by net is thought  to be
                                                                                            Impossible after the first day of death In subtropical  waters and beyond the sixth day
                                                                                            in temperate coastal waters.

                                                                                            INDEX TERMS:   Blodegradation,  Sampling,  Copepods, Sea water,  Bacteria.
                                                                                          '^OBSERVATIONS OH UPSTREAM MIGRATION BY IMAGINES OF SOME PLECOPTERA AND
                                                                                         EPHEMEBQFTERA", Madsen, B. L., Bengtson, J., Butz, I., Limnology and Oceanography,
                                                                                         Vol. 18, No. U, July 1973, PP 678-681.                          	

                                                                                                  The migration of the Imagines of some stream Insects was investigated using
                                                                                         sticky traps prepared with transparent polyethylene sheets to which hud been applied a
                                                                                         layer of sticky adhesive (Tanglefoot).  Hie sheets were set up transversely over the
                                                                                         stream, using a wooden frame or wires with one sticky side facing upstream and the
                                                                                         other downstream.  The plecopteran Braohyptera rial showed upstream migration;
                                                                                         Hemoura sp. did not.  The ephemeropterans Caenls rlvulorum, Baetis (rhodanl and
                                                                                         vernusf, and Eph*""*rella Ignlta °Tj showed upstream migration.

                                                                                         INDEX TERMS:  Aquatic Insects, Mature growth stage,  Migration patterns,  Mayflies,
                                                                                               Stonefllea, Upstream, Downstream,  Imagines.

-------
                                                                              2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-955U
 "BIOLOGICAL MODELS OF FRESHWATER COMMUNITIES", Taub,  F.  B.,  UnlTerslty of Washington,
 College of Fisheries, Seattle, Washington, Report No. EPA-660/3-73-O08, August 1973,
 8l pp.

          Data from continuous cultures of an alga (Chlamydomonas reinhardtil)  and
 protozoan (Tetrahymena vorax) have been used to construct a  model of algpl atjryHr^g crop
 over ranges of light intensity, dilution rate, and nutrient  concentration both In the
 absence and presence of predation by the protozoa.  The  model has been used to
 demonstrate response surfaces for the steady-state standing  crop values for the algae
 and protozoa over the ranges used In the laboratory experiments  (shown as Isopleths).
 The physical variables had a marked effect on the °lerl  standing crop which Influenced
 the growth rate of the protozoan.   The standing crop  of  the  protozoan was determined by
 growth and dilution rates.   The effect of the predation  was  dependent on the protozoan
 standing crop.   The response surfaces Indicate that predation can reduce algal  standing
 crop only within certain ranges of the variables considered.   The experimental
 density results and the model projections,  adjusted for  the  dally varying flow  rates,
 are shown.   The chemical analyses  for steady-state cultures  are  reported but not
 entirely Integrated into the model.   The  comparative  tenacities  of Aroclor 12U2, a
 polychlorlnated blphenyl and DDT,  were tested on the  alga and protozoan, and also on
 daphnlds, ostracods,  and guppies.

 INDEX TERMS:  Standing  crops, Model  studies, Ecosystems,  Biological communities, Food
      chains. Environment effects, Protozoa, Growth rates, Laboratory testa, Pesticide
      toxlcity. Freshwater fish, Crustaceans, Predation.  Computer models, Aquatic algae,
      Primary productivity, Secondary productivity, Continuous cultures. Population
	density.
  AMIC-9555
  'EFFECTS OF PROTOZOA ON THE  FATE OF PARTICULATE CARBON", Holm, H. W., Smith, F. A.,
  U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Southeast Environmental Research Laboratory,
  Athens, Georgia, Report No.  EPA-660/3-73-O07, August 1973, U2 pp.

           Laboratory studies  were designed to define the role of protozoa in the fate of
  particulate (bacterial)  organic  carbon.  Specific objectives were (l) to measure the
  effects of selected environmental parameters on protozoan growth ates, (2) to measure
  organic carbon in bacteria and protozoa, and (3) to quantltate carbon transformations
  in predator-prey experimental systems.  A growth system containing 2OO million
  :itrobacter/ml In 0.001 M phosphate of pH 7.5, Incubated at 25 C at a shaking  rate of
  IOO rpm, was found to be an optimal environment for protozoan growth.  The nutrient
 bacterium, Cltrobacter,  contained 8.6 times 10 to the minus 11 power mg C/cell, and
  'etrahymena pyrlformls  contained 1.1 ng C/cell.  T. pvrlformlB altered the amount and
  'brm of carbon in the  system while growing on bacteria!!  Of the total organic carbon
  iresent at the initiation of the predator-prey experiment (93 mg), 93 percent was In the
  »cterial fraction.  Within 96 hours, 38 percent of the carbon was released as C02{ 5
 percent was present as  inorganic carbon in the water and the remainder (57 percent) was
  lecreased from 86 to 2 mg within 96 hours, while the carbon in the protozoan 1)100888
  ncreaaed from 1 to Uo mg.   In the bacterial control, 11 percent of the organic carbon
  as released as C02 within 96 hours  while negligible amounts of inorganic carbon
    alned In the water.

INDEX  TERMS:   Protozoa, Growth rates, Environmental effects, Aquatic bacteria, Cycling
       nutrients, Food chains, Carbon cycle,  Linking factors, Ecosystems, Particulate
       carbon, Biotransformatlon,  Substrate utilization,  Fate of pollutants, Tetrahymena
	pvrlfonnis,  Cltrobacter.		_	_
                                                                                             AMIC-9556
                                                                                             "AN INTRODUCTION TO THE IDENTIFICATION OF CHIBONOMD LARVAE", Mason, W. T., Jr.,
                                                                                             U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Analytical Quality Control Laboratory,
                                                                                             Cincinnati, Ohio, EPA Report, January 1973,  90 pp.

                                                                                                      This Identification guide was prepared to serve as a supplement  to those
                                                                                             more definitive descriptions of chironomld larvae by Johannsen  (193U-37),  Roback  (1957),
                                                                                             Curry (1961), Darby (1962), and Beck and Beck (1966), which take into  account  a variety
                                                                                             of head and body characteristics for classification.  Head  capsules of various species
                                                                                             are pictured to complement the keys to subfamily and genus, and to familiarize the
                                                                                             beginner with structures that are used for Identification.

                                                                                             INDEX TERMS:  Aquatic insects. Diptera,  Larvae,  Systematlcs, Speciation,  Midges,
                                                                                                   ChironOBlds,  Insect morphology,  Sample preservation.
                                                                                          AMIC-9557
                                                                                          "BIOLOGICAL MDNITORIHG OF THE AQUATIC ENVIRONMENT BY THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
                                                                                          AGENCY", Weber, C.  I,, Reprint from:   Biological Methods for the Assessment of Water
                                                                                          Quality, Special Technical Publication 528, American Society for Testing Materials,
                                                                                          Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, 1973,  pp  1*6-60.

                                                                                                   The responsibility for water quality monitoring In  the  EPA  is shared  by  the
                                                                                          Office of Monitoring,  Office of Air and Water Programs,  Office of Enforcement  and
                                                                                          General Counsel, and Office of Research.  Four types of  monitoring have been
                                                                                          Identified - ambient trend monitoring,  source monitoring, case preparation monitoring,
                                                                                          and research monitoring.   The water quality monitoring network of the EPA will  consist
                                                                                          of JOCO to 10,OOO EPA-funded stations and 140,000  to  5O,OOO stations operated by state
                                                                                          and local agencies.  The  data will be stored  in a central EPA computerized system
                                                                                          called SlXjfcEr.   The  responsibility for quality control and the development, validation
                                                                                          and standardization  of chemical, microbiological,  and biological methodology for water
                                                                                          and wastewater has been assigned to the Analytical Quality Control Laboratory (AQCL)
                                                                                          (now the Methods Development and Quality Assurance Research laboratory-MDQARL)  in
                                                                                          Cincinnati.  Water quality is reflected In the species composition and diversity,
                                                                                          population density and physiological  condition of Indigenous communities of aquatic
                                                                                          organisms.  Biological methodology employed in water quality monitoring in the  EPA
                                                                                          deals primarily with sample collection, sample processing, counting and identification
                                                                                          of aquatic organisms,  biomass measurements, measurement of bioaccumulatlon and
                                                                                          biomagniflcation of  pollutants, and biological data processing and  interpretation.
                                                                                          IHDEX TERMS:  Monitoring, Water quality. Methodology, Bioindlcators,  Species diversity,
                                                                                                Bloaccumulation,  Biological magnification,  Data interpretation.

-------
                                                                                2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  MGC-9558
   "DESCRIPTION ASP ECOLOGY OF THREE STEBONEHA MfttFLY WfMFHS", Lewis, P. A.,
   Offprint from:  Proceedings of the First International Conference on Epheneroptera,
   Florid* A  and H University, Tallahassee, Florida, August 12-20, 1970, pp 57-72.

           Three  previously undescrlbed mayfly nymphs (Stenonema scitulum, S. termlnatum
   and E.  integrum) were  collected  from the Ohio and Scioto Rivers and from natural
   substrates in snail  streams in the Ohio Basin.  The nymphs vere reared in tanks to the
  adult stage and the  subimaginal  skins, nymphal exuviae and nymphs were preserved in 70
  percent ethanol.  Complete descriptions are given for the three species of nymphs.

  IKDEX TEBHS:  Msiyflies, Imature growth stage, Ecological distribution, Aquatic insects,
        Systematlcs, Speciation, Water quality, Nymphs,  Insect morphology.
                                                                                         T
                                                                                           AMIC-9559 (Continued)
Card 2/2
                                                                                            IHDEX TERMS:  Thermal poverplants, Phytoplankton, Thernal stress. Growth rates,
                                                                                                 Condensers, On-site investigations, Aquatic algae. Cooling water, Primary
                                                                                                 productivity, Heated water, Hater pollution effects, Laboratory tests,
                                                                                                 Methodology, Measurement, Plant growth, Environmental effects, Photosynthesis,
                                                                                                 On-site tests, Lake Wylie, Seasonal variation. Pumping rates, Data interpretation.
 AMIC-9559
 "FIELD INVESTIGATIONS OF THE RESPONSE OF PHYTOPLANKTOH TO THERMAL STRESS", GurtZ, M. E.,
 Weiss, C. M., University of North Carolina, Department of Enviroimental Sciences and
 Engineering, Chapel Hill, Horth Carolina, ESE Publication No. 321, December 1972, 152 pp.

          Investigations are reported of the effects of condenser passage on
 phytoplankton productivity and subsequent growth.  Samples before and after condenser
 passage were collected simultaneously for three different levels of temperature rise
 "10,  20,  and 30 F delta T) on six dates at the Allen steam-electric generating plant on
 Lake  Wylle,  North Carolina.  Controlled cooling rates appropriate to the average
 seasonal  meteorological conditions and temperatures Involved were applied to the
 samples.  Productivity measurements using the carbon-Ik method were made at several
 .lines during the cooling period,  including a final determination after 26 hours.  A
relationship between the intake temperature, delta T, and primary productivity was
 ound.  Relatively  constant inhibitions occurred for a 10 or 20 F rise in temperature,
 egardless of the initial  temperature,  although a trend toward greater inhibition*
 t initial temperatures  greater than 83 F was suggested.  A 30 deg F delta T produced
 uccessively greater  Inhibitions  in productivity with increasing intake temperature.
 bximum inhibition occurred during the  first 1-2 hours of cooling, and neither further
 nhlbition nor recovery  was observed during the remainder of the 26-hour cooling
jerlod   Results suggest that some  stimulation of photosynthesis may have occurred from
nechanical effects of condenser passage.  Growth of thermally stressed samples in
 utrlent-enhanced laboratory cultures was correlated with the magnitude of thermal
 xposure;  the highest final yields during a  2-week period were found for the samples
 ith the greatest thermal stress.  Diversity changes in phytoplankton populations
 ollowing  thermal exposure were suggested as a reason for these results.  Implications
  findings for power plant design were also discussed.	
                                                                                            'EFFECTS OF DIELDRIN OH BHOWN TROUT IH FIELD AND LABORATORY STUDIES", Dacre, J. C.,
                                                                                            Scott, D.,  New Zealand  Journal of thrlne and Freshwater Research, Vol. 1, No. 3,
                                                                                            September 1973, PP 235-216.

                                                                                                    Fifty-five  liters of dleldrln spray were accidentally discharged into the
                                                                                            Silver Stream, a tributary of the Taieri River, Otago, New Zealand, in September 1963.
                                                                                            All the  brown  trout  (Salmo trutta) in the lower portion of the stream were killed.
                                                                                            A quantitative survey was not carried out until January 196U,  and some repopulation
                                                                                            was noted.  The bottom  fauna  was sampled 7 days after the release of dieldrin.
                                                                                            Statistical analyses of the data showed no significant effect  of dieldrin on the
                                                                                            benthic  fauna.  Bioassays were conducted to determine the LC sub 50 for comparison with
                                                                                            other species.  Tissue  analyses for dieldrin residues were also carried out by
                                                                                            gas-liquid  chroma tography.  The 2U-hr LC sub 50 for dieldrin was found to be 0.016 ppro.
                                                                                            Minimum  residue levels  of dieldrin in skeletal muscles, liver,  and brain were 1-2  ppm.

                                                                                            INDEX TERMS:   Brown  trout. Water pollution effects, Dleldrln,  Pesticide toxlcity,
                                                                                                 Benthic  fauna,  Pesticide residues, Oiv-site investigations, Laboratory tests,
                                                                                                 Bioassay, Lethal  limit. Median tolerance limit, Animal tissues,  Bloaccumulation.
See also:  Category  1,  AMIC-8561, 9268, 9350, 9366, 9371, 93T9, 9^1, 9513, 9538
           Category  3,  AMIC-9126, 9561.
                                                                                        1*8

-------
                                                                             3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-69U1
 "SURVIVAL OF BACTERIA IH EXTREMl EHVIHOWCMTS", Weiss, R. L., Indiana University,
 Blocmington, Indiana, Dissertation Abstracts So. 73-2765, 1972, 235 pp.  (Complete
 report not available from AMIC.)

           Sulfolobus aeldocaldarlus is a newly described species of sulfur oxidizing
 bacteria  able  to live at low pH and high temperature.  The or^uilsn is also
 characterized  by facultative autotrophlc growth on sulfur or simple organic compounds
| and a  subunlt  cell wall l«n*Hng peptldoglycan.  In nature Sulfolobus was found to exist
 at temperatures from 60-9U C and at pH values from 1.6-3.  The temperature optimum for
 growth was 7O-75 C; whereas the pH optimum for C-lU-glutamate uptake was from 2-k.
 Survival  and growth of Sulfolobus In extreme conditions were demonstrated by slide
 Immersion studies and electron microscopy of natural samples taken at pH 2-3 and 75 C.
 These  studies  showed that in addition to Sulfolpbus, two groups of rod shaped bacteria
 exist  at  75 C.  These are distinguished from Sulfolobua by their morphology and cell waJU
 structure.  Electron microscopic studies showed that in flowing habitats with deposits
 of elemental S cells were enriched with thin filamentous appendages known as pill.
 These  were not found on cells from bubbling pools containing S crystals, suggesting
 that the possession of filaments Is a response to the physical flow of the habitat
 rather than the presence of S.   The results of laboratory experiments suggest a role of
 filament in the attachment of cells to S.   This attachment was observed directly by
 fluorescent and scanning electron microscopy.   Additional studies were carried out on the
 cell  envelope to determine the biochemical nature of the unusual cell wall structure.
 These studies demonstrated a llpoproteln and a highly charged cell wall with a high
 proportion of hydrophoblc  amlno acids.   Conceivably  such a structure  could contribute  to
 the survival  of Sulfolobus In extremes of  temperature and pH.
AMIC-69U1  (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS:  Sulfur bacteria,  Thermophilic bacteria. Cytologies! studies, Hot springs,
      Acidic soils, Acidic water,  Survival, Sulfolobus  acldocaldarlus, Characterization,
      Cell wall. Chemical composition.
                    AMIC-86»U
                    "ATP POOLS IH ACTIVATED SLUDGE", Chlu, S.  Y.,  Kao,  I.  C.,  Erickson,  L.  E.,  et al.,
                    Journal Water Pollution Control Federation.  Vol.  U5,  No.  8,  August 1973,  PP 17W-1758.

                             The possibility was Investigated of using adenosine triphosphate (ATP)  in
                    process Identification and control.  The behavior of ATP concentration  was studied along
                    with measurements for heterogeneous mlcroblal populations, such as  chemical oxygen demand
                    (COD) and MLSS,  in a continuous stirred tank reactor at various dilution  rates.   At each
                    dilution rate, the physiological behavior of cells  harvested from  the continuous-flow
                    reactor was studied using batch experiments.  Efforts were made to investigate the
                    relation among AFT, biomass, and substrate concentration in  all experiments,  and the
                    relation between the ATP content in the cells  and the substrate removal rate.  Results
                    of the experiments Indicate that dilution rate can affect  sludge activity and cellular
                    ATP content significantly and that ATP concentrations  in experiments with both
                    continuous and batch cultures were generally proportional  to the biomass  and  the amount
                    of substrate removed. Because ATP concentration  responds  rapidly  to cell viability
                    and changes with population shifts and the phase  of growth,  it  is  concluded that ATP may
                    be a useful variable In  process identification, operation, and  control, although further
                    understanding of the relationship between  ATP  concentration  and activated sludge
                    behavior is necessary if its full potential  as a  measurable  variable is to  be  realized.

                    MDEX TEIQ6:   Activated  sludge,  Biological treatment, Methodology, Nutrient removal,
                          Efficiencies,  Waste dilution, Laboratory tests, Chemical concentration, ATP pools.
                          Batch cultures, Substrate  utilization,  Sewage microorganisms.  Process control.
                          Process  identification, Continuous cultures.
                   AMIC-903U

                   "CELL YIELD AHD OBOWTH RATE IH ACTIVATED SLUDGE", Sherrard, J. H., Schroeder, E. D.,
                   Journal Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol. 1»5, No. 9, September 1973, pp 1989-1897.
                                                                                                   A  laboratory  study of the completely mixed activated sludge process  showed  that
                                                                                           the observed cell yield coefficient corresponding to each value of sludge age or mean
                                                                                           cell residence time  is a conceptually and practically significant parameter.  At low
                                                                                           cell residence times,  low nixed liquor suspended solids, high sludge production, and
                                                                                           high removal of Inorganic nutrients may be expected, while long residence times lead to
                                                                                           removal.  Removal of biochemical oxygen demand is nearly constant under both
                                                                                           conditions.

                                                                                           INDEX TEIMS:  Activated sludge, Growth rates, Laboratory tests,  Biological treatment,
                                                                                                Hutrlent removal,  Cell yield, Sewage microorganisms,  Residence time.  Substrate
                                                                                                utilization.

-------
                                                                              3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-9126
   "SULFUR AW) THE TOXICm OF THE RED A.1CA CERAMIUM RUBRUM TO BACILLUS SUBTILIS",
   Ucawa,  M.,  Thomas, V. M., Jr., Buckley, L. J., Uebel, J. J., Journal of Phyeology.
  Vol.  9,  Ho. 3, September 1973, pp 302-3O>K

            In an Investigation the antibiotic activity of algae, the red alga Geranium
  rubrum  showed the  greatest growth inhibitory activity against B. aubtllls.  Quantities
  of C. rubrum were  collected and assayed to determine the nature or the inhibitory
  substance.  The algne were washed, blotted, and allowed to air dry at room temperature.
  The dried algae were ground, extracted with benzene for ^-5 days In a Soxhlet extractor,
  and dried In vacuo to yield the crude active extract.  The crude extract was dissolved
  in chloroform and  chrcoatographed to yield an active fraction which was prepared for
  further identification by thin-layer chromatography.  Crystalline sulfur was the
  inhibitory  substance isolated from the red seaweed.  This alga was unusual In that it
  contained a much higher free sulfur content than other red and brown al^te tested.

  INDEX TERMS:  Rhodophyta, Algal toxins, Sulfur,  Inhibition, Growth rates,  Marine algae.
        Bacteria,  Toxlcity, Isolation,  Sulfur compounds.  Bacillus aubtllls.  Geranium
        rubrum,  Sample preparation,  Thin layer chroma tography.
 AfflC-9176
 "HATURAL HABITAT OF CARYOFHAHOH IATUH". Trentini, W. C., Hachen,  C., Canadian
 Journal of Microbiology. Vol. 19. Ho. 6, June 1973, pp 689-69!*.

          When samples of fresh dung from pigs, horses, sheep,  or  cattle were enriched
 to encourage the growth of Caryophanon latum, the organism was found to be specifically
 associated with cattle dung!Several sheep dung samples were  found to be positive for
 C. latun, but all were taken frcn a pasture where sheep and cattle were graced together.
 Til samples taken from sheep not pastured with cattle were negative.  Autoclaved
 samples of cattle, horse, nn\ sheep dung all supported growth  ani natural morphology of
 C. latun after l-fc days exposure.  Control samples exposed to  air in areas far removed
 Trom cattle were uniformly negative.  Aseptlcally collected 'free catch"  samples from
 cattle were mainly negative, as were samples collected from the fistulated rumen.
 Enrichment of various other sources was undertaken.  Our total findings support the
 hypothesis that £. laturn is a natural,  specific,  and temporary resident of cattle  dung
 and is dispersed to new droppings by contaminated air and also probably by flying
 insects or cattle movement.

 IHDEX TERMS:   Farm wastes,  Water pollution sources.  Pollutant  Identification,  Isolation,
       Habitats,  Domestic animals,  Bacteria,  Caryophanon  laturn, Schlzomycetes,
       Emrtrormental samples.
 AMIC-9ll*2
 "MICPOBIAL DEGRADATIOH OF PETROLEUM AT LOW TEMPERATURE",  Cundell,  A.  M., Trailer,
 P. W., Marine Pollution Bulletin.  Vol.  k,  Ho. 8,  August 1973,  pp 125-127.

          Hydrocarbon-degrading bacteria were  isolated from littoral sediments
 collected  in Chesapeake Bay, Nova  Scotia,  and from  oil-contaminated soil adjacent to a
 natural oil seep at Cape  Simpson,  Alaska by an enrichment culture  technique using Nos. 1
 and 6 fuel oils and naphthalene as enrichment substrates.   Th« enrichment flasks were
 incubated at 0, 8, 16 and 2U C.  The majority of  bacteria were isolated from the 16 and
 2U C enrichment flasks and were members of the genera Pseudcmcnas, Arthrobacter,
 lorynebacterlum, Vibrio,   4.chromobacter, and B re vlbac ter ium.  The range of hydrocarbon
 utilization was studied using a Pseudomonas and an Arthrobacter  isolate.  Growth on
 solid media containing the hydrocarbons at 16 C was used  as criteria and it was shown
 that the  isolates grew at the expense of dodecane, hexylbenzene, naphthalene, phenaathra-
 cene,  decalln,  tetralln and methylcyclohexane but not xylene.  Growth occurred between
 I C  and 21* C within lU days of incubation  suggesting  the bacteria are tolerant at a range
of temperatures.   The  data suggest that bacteria  existing in low temperature marine and
 ••easts! e«rir«nmMBts play  a significant role in the bloavmrBdatlon of pollutant
ISDEX TE»E:  Isolation,  Bottom sediments, (ferine baetsria, Mlcreblal d«g>aa«tlon.
      Littoral, Growth  rates,  Petroleum hydroeartoma. Substrate utilisation, Fate of
      pollutants. Hydrocarbon-oxidizing bacteria, Aromtic hyarooarfcons, Aliphatic
      hydrocarbons.
                                                                                        50
AMIC-9177
"DISSOCIATIOH IH A MARIHE PSEUDOM3SAD", Gow, J. A., DeVoe, I. W., MacLeod, R.
Canadian Journal of Microbiology, Vol. 19, Mo. 6, June 1973, pp 695-701.
A.,
         Eight morphological variants, the product of colonial dissociation, were
isolated from cultures of the marine pseudomonad B-16.  Features which distinguished the
variants were smooth versus rough colony type,  the presence or absence of color, ind
differences In colony diameter.  The variants differed In their capacity to form stable
protoplasts and to grow at subqptimal Na(plus) concentrations In defined medium.   All,
however, required Na(plus) for growth.  The ability of the organism to accumulate
alpba-anlnoisobutyric acid (AIB) and the requirement for Na(plus)  for this process was
not affected by dissociation.

IKJEX TE!*6:  Marine bacteria,  Isolation,  Radioactivity techniques,  Growth rates,  Sodium,
      Salt tolerance, Assay,  Methodology,  Essential nutrients, Deficient elements,
      Absorption, Pseudcnaoads, Bacterial  physiology,  Characterization,  Dissociation,
      Bloaceumulation, alpha-Amlnolsobutyrlc acid,  Culture media.  Protoplasts, Cell
      morphology, Nutrient media.

-------
                                                                              3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL M8THODS
  AfflC-9183
   •tOMPETrnVE GROWTH OF SEWAGE ORGANISMS", Poon,
   the Environmental Engineering Division, Proce
  Engineers, Vol. 99
Engineering
, BO. EtU, J
                      P. C., Wang, K. K., Journal of
                       of the American Society of Civil
August 1973, pp 1*«9-
           Because of the occasional overgrowth of Geotrlchum candldum in the Field
  Point Sewage Treatment Plant (Providence, R.I.), especially during winter, studies were
  undertaken to determine whether certain environmental factors, particularly street
  runoff, might give this fungus a competitive advantage over sewage bacteria.   Growth
  characteristics of sewage bacteria and Geotrichum were compared by the Warburg
  respironetrlc technique under identical conditions when exposed to simulated salted
  snow melt at 10 and 20 C.  The snow melt contained chloride ion concentrations of $,000
  and 10,OOO mg/1 and asphalt (with and without ultraviolet irradiation) 5-500mg/l.   As
  expected, all activities under control conditions at 20 C, including oxygen uptake rate,
  specific growth rate, and rate of COD removal,  Indicated that the sewage fungus was less
  competitive.   However, low temperature,  slug doses of chloride ion at 5,000 mg/1 and
  10,OOO mg/1 concentrations,  and the presence of ultraviolet Irradiated asphalt were
  found to affect differently  the growth of activated sludge and Oeotrlchum.  Individually
  or in combination,  these factors significantly reduced the growth activities  of
  activated sludge while Geotrichum was ouch less affected under the sane environment.
  It Is concluded that  such factors in combination with low pH and high carbohydrate
  content  in sewage could  cause a predominance of sewage fungus in treatment  plants.

  INDEX TERMS:  Sewage bacteria,  Fungi,  Water temperature,  Cold resistance, Urban runoff,
       Asphalt, Growth  rates, Competition,  Sodium chloride,  Geotrichum candldum.
 AMC-98U8
 "DIRECT FLUORESCENT-ANTIBODY TECHNIQUE FOB THE MICROBIOLOGICAL EXAMHATIOH OF FOOD AMD
 ENVIRONMENTAL SWAB SAMPLES FOR SALMDBELLAE",  Insalata, N. F., MahnKe, C. W., Dunlap,
 V.  G., Applied Microbiology Vol. 26, No. 3, September 1973, PP 268-270.

          Comparative studies of a modified fluorescent-antibody procedure and the 5
 7 day method used by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists for the
 detection of Salmonella were made on 151 samples of wheat products and 183 swab samples
 from In-process equipment.  The agreement between the two methods for the 33!* samples
 nested was  92.5 percent.  Fod samples yielded 9^.7 percent agreement, whereas the swab
 samples yielded 90.7 percent agreement.  There were 7.5 false positives for the total
number of samples tested.   Mo false negatives were obtained by using the
 luorescent-antlbody  method.   The study also demonstrated that pooling suspect samples
 s possible  to  permit larger nunfcers to be tested simultaneously by FA.

 NDEX TERMS:  Salmonella,  AOAC  Methods,  Fluorescent antibody techniques, Method
      evaluation.
MCC-9258
 "quwmTATivE EXTRACTION OF ADEHOSIHE TRIPHOSPHATE FROM CULTIVABLE ARD HOST-GROWH
MICROBES:  CALCUL/mOW OF ADENOEISE TRIPHC6PHATE POOLS", Dhople, A. M., Hanks, J. H.,
Applied Microbiology.  Vol. 26, Ho. 3, September 1973, PP 399-J»03.

         Existing data on adenoslne triphosphate (ATP) pools in microbes are deficient
for  two reasons:  (1)  incomplete extractions of ATP, and (2) the failure to take into
account that the  adverse effects of extracting procedures on standard ATP exert
analogous effects on the ATP released from bacterial cells.  Methods for correcting
observed yields and calculating ATP pools have been demonstrated.  Three bacterial
species were used in the studies on extraction of ATP;  Escherlchia coll, Hycobacterium
phlel,  and Mycobacterium lepraeaurium.  Perchloric acid and n-butanolTwere disqualified
because of inconvenient  procedures.  The new extraction procedure had minimal  effects
on standard ATP,  liberated 100 percent of the ATP pools from the three representative
species of microbes, and caused no Ionic imbalance or quenching of biolumlnescence.
This method Involves vortexing of cell suspensions for 10 a with 23 percent chloroform
                                                                       animal cells.
                                                                       INDEX TERMS:  Separation techniques, E. coll, Adenosine triphosphate,  Mycobacterium
                                                                             phlel, Mycobacterium lepratmurlum, Sample preparation.
                                                                       AMIC-9303
                                                                       'XHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS, BACTERIAL COUNTS,  AND POTENTIAL SHELF-LIFE OF  SHRIMP FROM
                                                                       VARIOUS LOCATIOHS OH THE NORTHWESTERN GULF OF MEXICO",  Ccbb, B. F.,  III,  Vanderzant,
                                                                       C., Thompson,  C.  A., Jr., Custer,  C.  S.,  Journal of Milk  and Food Technology, Vol.  36.
                                                                       Bo. 9,  September 1973, PP U63JU68.	=BS-

                                                                                Because of the variation in microbiological characteristics of different
                                                                       waters  and consequent spoilage patterns in shrimp,  amino  nitrogen (AA-ff), ammonia,  total
                                                                       volatile nitrogen (TvTJ),  trlmethylamlne nitrogen (TMN), bacterial content, and pH were
                                                                       evaluated as means of measuring spoilage  and  shelf-life of shrimp.  Freshly harvested
                                                                       white shrimp (Penaeus setlferus) from 13  locations on the northwestern constline of the
                                                                       Gulf of Mexico and brown shrimp (P. aztecus)  from 3  water depths near Port Aransas,
                                                                       Texas,  and from a commercial  fishing  boat were placed on sterile ice, allowed to spoil,
                                                                       and examined.   Samples for chemical analysis were homogenized with trichloroacetic
                                                                       acid and centrlfuged.   Both IVJf and AA-N  varied considerably from  sample to sample %nd
                                                                       did not show a consistent pattern of  change during iced storage.   TMH production was
                                                                       evident in boat-shrimp samples with high TVN Levels.  Bacterial counts  of fresh  shrimp
                                                                       did not exceed 10,000/g.   Nine  of the 10 boat-shrimp samples had counts in excess of
                                                                       1 million/8.   Counts  of samples spoiled on sterile ice ranges from 2  million-10
                                                                       bllllon/g.  The ratio TVM/AA Ji nay be useful in conjunction with appej-nnce and odor as a
                                                                       measure of spoilage.   Samples with TVK/AA-N greater than 1.3 mg N/mlllimole were
                                                                       evaluated as poor.  Maximum potential shelf-life of boat-shrlnp was reduced 0-15  days
                                                                       by  handling and storage.

                                                                       INDEX TERMS:  Shrimp, Chemical analysis. Odor, Microbial degradation, Biological  samples,
                                                                            Spoilage, Sample preparation.

-------
                                                                              3.   MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-9353
   'THE MICFGCALORIMETRY OF MICROBIAL GROWTH", Jones, J. M., Process Biochemistry,
  Vol. 8, Ho. 9, September 1973, PP 19-20.

           A flow microcalorlmeter has been used to monitor the heat production of
  bacterial cultures.  In the calorimeter, solutions are pumped through cells which are
  situated In a sandwich of semiconductor thermopiles and a heat sink.  Heat transferred
  across the thermopiles produces a small voltage directly proportional to the heat.
  Plots of actual and integrated heat output, glucose concentration,  acetate concentration
  and cell concentration versus time show that thermograms reveal two distinct phases In
  growth patterns: (1) the exponential growth phase and (2) the phase In which acetate
  produced In phase 1 is consumed.  Therefore, heat output can be used to describe the
  separate phases of growth processes.  Several applications of the technique are
  suggested such as monitoring of fermentation processes,  production of antibiotics, and
  reactions to antibiotics.

  INDEX TERMS:  Bacteria, Monitoring,  Growth rates, Heat,  Cultures, Mlcrocalorimetry.
 "A THEORETICAL STUDY OF FACTORS  INFLUENCING THE MICROBIAL POPULATION DYNAMICS OF
 THE ACTIVATED-SLUDGE PROCESS  - I.   THE  EFFECTS OF DIURNAL VARIATIONS OF SEWAGE
 AND CASWIVOHDUS CILIATED PROTOZOA", Curds,  C. R., Water Research. Vol. 7, No. 9,
 September 1973, PP 1269-1284.

          Mathematical  models  and computer simulations  have been used In examining the
 theoretical implications of diurnal variations In sewage flow,  bacterial content of the
 sewage, and sewage substrate  concentration on the mlcrobial population dynamics and
 effluent quality of a  completely-mixed  activated-sludge plant.   Variations  in sewage
 substrate resulted In  variations in the concentrations of substrate  In the  effluent and
 bacteria In the sludge.  Variations In  the  bacterial content  of sewage affected only
 the bacteria-consuming dilate populations  whereas variations in the flow of sewage
 affected all populations.   When nil three sewage parameters were varied simultaneously
 she effect was cumulative.   The effects of  carnivorous clllates preying on
 >acterla-consuming clllates have been considered for the first  time.   At least four
 :ypes  of dilate  predator/prey situations could arise  since both carnivore  and prey can
 >e  either free-swimming or attached forms.   In general, when  the carnivore  was a
 'ree-swimming form,  oscillations, which may or may not dampen,  were  obtained; when the
carnivore was an  attached form, the dilate prey was washed out of the reactor.
However,  the predictions of the population  dynamics of the organisms also depend to a
 .arge  extent on the  values  of the various growth constants used.
 NDEX TERMS:  Sewage  bacteria.  Activated sludge, Flow rates, Population, Mathe
      models. Protozoa, Growth rates. Flagellates, Substrates.
atical
            AKIC-9V35
            "SOIL BACTERIA IN LAHD-DRAINAGE WATER",  Evans, M. R., Owens, J. D., Water Research.
            Vol. 7,  No. 9, September 1973,  PP 1295-1300.

                     A general viable count was made of bacteria in the discharge of a subsurface
            pasture  drain during the winter of 1971/72 to determine whether significant loss of
            natural  soil bacteria occurred  and whether concentrations  fluctuated with flow rate.
            Viable counts were made  on 13^  samples by membrane  filtration.  Soil samples from
            various  depths in the drainage  plot were used to estimate  the number of bacteria
            occurring In the  soil.   The concentration of bacteria in the drainage water was related
            to flow  rate,  and an equation was developed to describe this relationship.  The total
            number of viable  bacteria in the drainage water discharged during the k months
            represented approximately O.I percent of an estimate of the total number of viable
            bacteria present  In the  soil of the experimental plot.   It was concluded that the
            numbers  of bacteria lost from soil by wash-out in drainage water were an insignificant
            fraction of the probable annual production of bacteria  in  the soil.

            INDEX  TEHMS:  Flow rates,  Soil  bacteria, Drainage water.
           AMIC-9't97
           'VIRUS REMOVAL IN HAWAIIAN SOILS", Young, R.  H.  F.,  Burbank,  N.  C.,  Jr.,
           Journal American Water Works Association, Vol. 65, No.  9,  Part 1,  September 1973,
           pp 59B-6OU.
         Three types of Hawaiian soils (Wahiava, Lahalna and Tantalus) were used in
laboratory studies in percolation columns to determine the extent of travel or possible
breakthrough of viruses into the underlying source of water supply,   rhe viruses used
were a coliphage Tk BII mutant, and poliovirus Type II (Lansing) H8.  The columns
containing the selected soils were subjected to intermittent percolating water with a
known concentration of virus, simulating the action of a. cesspool leaching into the
ground.  The effluent from the soil column was collected and analyzed for viral content
by plaque-forming techniques.  The Wahiawa and Lahaina soils were 100 percent effective
in the retention or adsorption of bacteriophage TU from percolating  water at  the
applied concentration of 2.3 million/ml of feed solution at depths of 6 and 2.5 in.
Breakthrough of the bacteriophage occurred immediately in both  soils for the
1.5-In.-deep soil columns at an applied concentration of 1.5 million/ml of feed
solution.  The Tantalus cinder subsoil proved ineffective In holding the bacteriophage
at the recorded thicknesses of 15,  12, and 6 in.  at the applied concentration 1.5
minion/ml of feed solution.  The breakthrough concentration was 500,000/ml.
Percolation tests with Wahiawa and Lahalna soils  and Tantalus cinder demonstrated that
short soil columns did not completely remove poliovirus Type II  from percolating water
when the virus was applied at a dosage of 150,000 pfu/ml.  Breakthrough occurred
immediately for the 1 1/2- and 2 1/2-in.  soil columns.  Results  with  Tantalus  cinder
dosed at 150,000 pfu/ml of poliovirus Type II  demonstrated very  low virus retention.
                                                                                        52

-------
                                                                            3.  MICRqBIOtQSICALJUETHQDS
          (Continued)
                                   Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS:  Viruses, Soils, Efficiencies, Percolating water, Leaching,  Retention,
      Hawaii, Lactosols, Volcanic cinder, Pollutant removal.
AMIC-9505
 "SEDIMENT COLIFOKM POPULATIONS AND POST CHLORIHATION BEHAVIOR OF WASTEWATER BACTERIA",
Hulls,  S.  C.,  Keen, S. R., Davis,  E. M., Water and Sewage Works. Vol. 120,  No.  10,
October 1973,  pp 79-61.

          Enumeration  and Identification of bacteria In wastewater collected from
the overflow weirs  of two secondary clariflers,  showed that  significant aftergrowth
of bacteria  occurred  when samples  were  chlorinated at  a level of 1.0 mg/1.  Total
collform bacterial  counte, fecal conform  bacteria and the types considered
"non-coliform" «U demonstrated remarkable regrowth.   Fecal  streptococci on the other
hand, exhibited  an appreciably slower die-off  rate than in the non-chlorinated  sample.
The data suggest that chlorinatlon effectively decreased  the competitive bacterial
populations.   Surviving bacteria are listed.   Survival of enteric bacteria  In
effluent from  waste stabilization  ponds was found  to be distinctly related  to   •
phytoplankton  concentrations.  The results of  survival tests after chlorinatlon at
levels  up to 5.0 mg/1 with samples containing  more than 20,000 areal standard units of
phytoplankton  suggest that if disinfection is  incomplete, nutrients are present,
and bacterial  competition is reduced, indicator and pathogenic bacteria may reestablish.
Indicator  bacteria have also been  found in sediments of u npolluted waters, and high
levels  were  found in  some cases where sediments were disturbed.  It is recommended
that rapid and more precise methods, of  generic identification be developed  to eliminate
erroneous  conclusions which may occur from elevated counts of bacteria resulting'
from bacterial aftergrowth or natural populations.

IHDEX TERMS:   Chlorinatlon, Sediments, Waste water (pollution), Enteric bacteria,
      Pathogenic bacteria. Aftergrowth, Survival.
"IDEHTIFICATION AND INCIDENCE OF KLEBSIELLA IN CHLORINATED WATER SUPPLIES",  Ptak,  D.
J., Glnsburg, V., Wllley, B. ?., Journal "Smerican Water Works Association, Vol.  65,
No. 9, Part 1, September 1973, pp 60<»-607.

         Concern over the standard method of classifying conforms,  caused the
Microbiology Unit, Water Purification Lab., City of Chicago,  to institute a  study  to
determine whether a more accurate and rapid classification could be  obtained.  The
"Modified R/B Enteric Differential System" was selected and used to  identify the
cause of the occasional positive reactions which occurred during water analysis.   The
bacterium Identified was Klebslella pneumoniae which is known to be  of fecal origin.
pneumonia
have iden
Since the standard IMV1C test would have identified Aerobacter aerogenes,  generally
considered to be of non-fecal origin, an Improved laboratory procedure appears to be
needed.  The modified R/B procedure used by the Water Purification Laboratory and the
resulting reactions are described.   Klebsle1.1" has also been found to occur more
frequently in treated water supplies than other organisms possibly because it is
encapsulated In the mucold phase.  Therefore,  procedures should be employed to avoid
incorrect identification of the organisms.
IHDEX TERMS:  Pathogenic bacteria,  Pollutant identification,
      methods, R/B procedure,  Klebslella.
                         IMViC test,  Standard
AMIC-95U1
"BACTERIAL	    	  	  	 , _.,_.
Brock, T. D., Limnology and Ocenaography. Vol. 18, No. U, July 1973, pp 628-6314.

         Samples of sediment were collected from  Lake Wlngra, Wisconsin, from
January  19 - July 21,  1972, for use in tests  to determine whether bacteria  In sediments
adapted  to low temperatures.  Samples were collected with a type R  sampler, transferred
to collection bottles, and kept at U C until  use.  DO and air, water, and sediment
temperatures were recorded at the time of sampling.  Glucose incorporation  was
measured by adding C-lU-labeled material to sediment suspensions and incubating  In the
dark at  temperatures of 0 to 50 C.  Release of C-lU-labeled C02 was measured  by  trapping
it in scintillation fluid.  Growth rates were studied by preparing cultures of the sedi-
ment bacteria for incubation at U, 15, and 25 C.  The results show that viable counts of
bacteria were always higher at 25 C than U C, although the temperature of, the sediments
remained below U C for over 3 months.  All of the organisms Isolated and initially
cultivated at U C grew better at 25 C; no obllgately psychrophinc bacteria were
found.   Isotope studies to measure the temperature optima of the resident bacterial
flora showed that the optimum temperature for incorporation of C-lU-glucose into cell
material and conversion of C-lU-glucose Into C-1U-C02 remained at 25 C or greater nil
winter.  A true psychrophlllc flora does not develop in these sediments in winter, and
bacterial decomposition processes occur at a much slower rate In winter than  In summer.

IHDEX TERMS:  Cultures, Bacteria, Growth rates, Water temperature, Degradation
      (decomposition). Adaptation, Metabolism.
                                                                                       53

-------
                                                                            3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-9561
"METHOD FOR THE SELECTIVE ENUM3RATION OF BLUE-GREEK BACTERIA IB WATER", McCurdy,
H. D., Jr., Hodgson, W. F., Applied Microbiology. Vol. 26, Ho. 5, November 1973, PP
688-686.

         A membrane filter method for the selective enumeration of blue-green bacteria
has been developed which, on the basis of studies with laboratory cultures and field
•tests, has proved to be both practical and reproducible.  The filters are Incubated
under specified conditions of temperature and illumination on a mineral salts agir
medlw supplemented with yeast extract and containing cyclohexlmlde to eliminate
eukaryotic contaminants.  (Reprinted from Applied Microbiology. Vol. 26, No.  5,
November 1973, pp 68S-686.  Copyright 1973 by the Anerlcan Society for Microbiology.
Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)

INDEX TERMS:  Pollutant Identification, Aquatic bacteria,  Cyanophyta, Aquatic algae,
      Selectivity, Methodology, Separation techniques. Isolation, Membrane filters.
      Enumeration, Prokaryotes, Culturing techniques,  Eukaryotea, Heproduciblllty.
 AMIC-956U
 "APPLICABILra OF THE REVERSE JKW FttffiR TECHNIQUE  TO MAUDE MICBCBIAL STUDIES",
 Griffiths, R.  P.,  Hanus,  F.  J.,  Morlta,  R. Y., Applied Microbiology. Vol. 26, No,  5,
 Hovember 1973, pp 687-691.

          The validity of using the reverse-flow  filtration technique to quantitatively
 concentrate marine bacteria  was  evaluated with both  a pure culture of Vibrio marlnus
 and seawater samples.  After filtration,  the volume  of the filtrate and the combined"
 concentrates were  measured to determine  the concentration factor.  Analyses were made
 on nil fractions.  Colony forming units  (Cm) in the various fractions  and In
 unflltered samples were determined Vy the  spread-plate technique using  Lib-X medium.
 Total substrate uptake was determined by assaying for C-lU with labeled glutamate, and
biooass was  determined with C-lU.labeled prollne.  Assay of blomasE In  the concentrate,
filtrate, membrane filter, and filter washings showed that essentially  no
concentration occurred, and Most of the bacteria remained on the filter.  Furthermore
data Indicate that cells were  altered during the filtration procedure.  Since the
number of cells lost on the filter Is significant and Inconsistent they cannot be
represented by a constant.  Consequently, results obtained by this procedure should be
Interpreted with caution.

IBEEX TERNS:  Marine bacteria. Separation techniques, Reverse-flow filtration,
      Preeoncentratlon, Method validation.
AMIC-9562
 "MICHODIU/nOH AHTIBIOTIC SUSCEPMBILITJf TEST:   EXAMIHATIOII OF CERTAIH VARIABLES",
Tllton,  R.  C., Llebernan, L.,  Gerlach,  E. H., Applied Microbiology. Vol.  26,  Ho.  5,
Hovember 1973, PP 658-665.

          A semlautomated mlcrodilutlon susceptibility test is described.   The effect
 of certain parameters such as inoculua size, growth media, incubation conditions, and
 inoculum dispensing systems was studied with E. coll, Staphylococcus aureus,  and
Paeudomonas aeruglnosa.  Both medium type and~lnoculu«i size caused significant variation!
in the Bin&un InhiDfTory concentrations (MIC)  of certain antibiotic-organism
combinations   No effect on MIC was observed as a function of Incubator type.  Efforts to
read a reproducible MIC value  in less than 12 h failed.   A commercially available wire
pronged Inoculate* was determined to be Inaccurate and unsafe.  Disposable dropper
nipettes proved to be economical,  accurate,  and precise.   Although a standard method for
mlcrodilutlon  antibiotic susceptibility testing 1» not proposed, data are presented whlct
show that future attempts at standardized procedures are  mandatory if Inter-  and
intralaboratory reliability Is desired.

TTOEX  TERMS:   Resistance,  Antibiotics (pesticides), E. coll, Methodology, Cultures,
       Inhibition  Toxleity,  Pesticide toxlclty, Antibiotic dilution tests,
      sJphyScus  aureus, Pseudc«c«as aeruglnosa. Minimum Inhibitory concentrations.
                                                                                         AMIC-9566
                                                                                         "LIPOLmC BACTERIA Dl THE OTTAWA RIVER", Blaise, C. R., Armstrong,
                                                                                         Microbiology. Vol. 26, Ho. 5, Hovember 1973, PP 733-7'tO.
                                                                    J.  B.,  Applied
                                                                                                  Llpolytic bacteria were Isolated from two stations on Brewery Creek, an  arm
                                                                                         of the Ottawa River, during the winter of 1971-72.  Total counts were approximately
                                                                                         Sevenfold higher at the more polluted downstream station, whereas llpolytlc counts
                                                                                         were about 100-fold hltfier.  At this station, significantly more llpolytlc bacteria
                                                                                         grew on plates Incubated at 20 C than at k C, suggesting that the population was
                                                                                         comprised of both mesophlles and paychrophlles.  However, at the upstream station,
                                                                                         approximately the same number were obtained at both temperatures.  A total of 1*3^
                                                                                         isolates, mainly from the downstream station, were tentatively classified.  The n»jor
                                                                                         groups were Pseudoaonaa, Aclnetobacter-Moraxella,  and Aerooonas.   Though the total
                                                                                         number of llpolytlc bacteria was fairly constant throughout the winter,  the relative
                                                                                         abundance of the aclnetobacters dropped from approximately 90  percent In November  to
                                                                                         less than 10 percent In March,  and then Increased.  The aercnonads and pseudomonads
                                                                                         showed the opposite trend.  Most of the bacteria,  though isolated at k C,  also grew  at
                                                                                         30 C.  Llpolysis,  however, was generally strongest at 20 C  or  below.   (Reprinted from
                                                                                         Applied Mlerobiglojy.  Vol. 26,  Ho.  5, Hovember 1973,  PP 733~7'*O.   Copyright  1973 by  the
                                                                                         American Society for Microbiology.   Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
                                                                                         INDEX TERMS:   Aquatic bacteria,  Isolation, Water temperature, Water pollution,
                                                                                               Biological properties,  Liplds, Blolndicators, Lipolytic bacteria, Biochemical
                                                                                               characteristics. Substrate utilization, Ottawa River, Psychrophillc bacteria,
                                                                                               Hesophillc bacteria, Biochemical tests.

-------
                                                                              3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-9567
   "ESCHERICHIA COLI SEROGROUPS  ISOLA1ED FROM STREAMS  IN PENNSYLVANIA,  1965 TO 1972",
  Glantz,  P.  J.,  Applied Microbiology,  Vol.  26,  No. 5,  November 1973,  pp 71*1-743.

            Of 3,200 cultures of Escherichia  coll Isolated from streams In Pennsylvania
  over a 7-year period,  &2.U6 percent or 2,639 were O serogrouped.   The largest  number of
  cultures (33.1* percent) belonged to 0 groups 1 to 26, and the second highest number
  (16.8 percent)  belonges to 0  groups 60 to  88.   The  Individual E. eoll 0 groups moat
  frequently Isolated were AD03, l8ac,  SB., 3, 7,  73,  139, and OXT3.~~Prmctically every
  known standard E.  coll 0 group was  found In the streams.  It  was not possible  to
  Identify the K and H antigen  of  every E. coll  isolate.  Serotypes  of E.  coli
  02a:Kl:H6,  026:K60:H11, 055:K59:H27,  cS6:iS55:&2, ll2ab:K68:H2, 125ab:Jf70iB2T,
  128ab:K67:H2, and O138!K8l:HlU known  to be pathogenic for humans and animals were
  identified.  Cultures  having  the same K antigen but a different H antigen for
  enteropathogenic  E.  coli 0  groups 6,  l8ab, l8ac, llab, 126, 127a, 139, 1M, and ll*7
  were  also Isolated.  (Reprinted  from  Applied Microbiology.  Vol. 26, No. 5, November
  1973,  PP 71*1-71»3.  Copyright  1973 by  the American Society for Microbiology.
  Reprinted by permission of  the copyright owner.)

  INDEX TERMS:  E. coll, Natural streams. Pollutant identification, Isolation, Water
        pollution sources, Pathogenic bacteria,  Enteric bacteria, Pennsylvania, Serotypes,
        Biochemical tests. Fecal conforms, Culturing techniques.
 AM1C-9571
 "THE MICROBIAL ASSOCIATIONS DEVELOPING ON EXPERIMENTAL TRICKLING FILTERS  IRRIGATED
 WITH DOMESTIC  SEWAGE",  Halls,  N.  A.,  Board,  R. G.,  Journal of Applied Bacteriology.
 Vol. 36,  No. 3, September 1973, PP U65-U71*.                       	

           Organisms in trickling filters were sampled by pumping waste from a  eewage
 treatment plant through rotating  Perspex tubes with roughened inside  surfaces.  The
 biological films were collected by plugging  one  end of the tubes, adding Ringer's
 solution and glass beads, plugging the open  end  of  the tube,  and shaking to dislodge
 the film.  Disrupted films were cultured for 5 days and tested by Gram staining, by the
 oxldase test, and for motllity, carbohydrate breakdown,  and gelatin hydrolysis.  The
 bacterial flora of the film which developed  on experimental trickling filters Irrigated
 with domestic sewage was dominated by  Aclnetioaacter and yellow-plgmented Gram negative
 rod-shaped organisms and It was deduced that purification  In  certain  aerobic waste
 treatment processes  may depend upon an association  of these 2 organisms.  Further
 evaluation of the  operational procedures  likely  to  have a  selective influence on the
microbial association which becomes dominant was made In studies using synthetic
 sewage.

IHBEX TERMS:  Sampling,  Sewage bacteria, Dominant organii
      Trickling filters, Acinetobacter.
Separation techniques,
                              AMIC-9572
                               '•IHE OBSERVATION OF MICRO-ORGANISMS ON SURFACES BY INCIDENT FLUORESCENCE
                              MICROSCOPY", Paton, A.  M.,  Jones, S. M., Journal of Applied Bacteriology. Vol. 36,
                              No. 3, September 1973,  PP UUlJ*l*3.

                                        Two methods vere developed for viewing surfaces for microorganisms by Incident
                              fluorescence microscopy.  The direct method involves applying optical brlghteners and
                              counterstains directly  to samples such as meat, fish, skin, plants and minerals and
                              mounting them on glass  slides for microscopic observation.  The tape method involves
                              placing adhesive tape on surfaces, such as on food processing equipment, removing the
                              tape, and placing it on a glass slide until processing.  Tapes can be treated with a
                              fixative to assist retention of organisms, and counterstalned.  For viewing, the tapes
                              are treated with optical brlghteners and mounted, adhesive side up, on glass slides.
                              The procedures have been used in microbiological studies associated with food
                              manufacture, agricultural research,  and dermatological Investigations.

                              INDEX TERMS:  Bacteria,  Yeasts,  Sample preparation, Fluorescent microscopy.
                             AMIC-9573
                              "THE  PRESENCE OF CLOSTRIDIUM BOTULINUM IN INDONESIAN WATERS",  Mortojudo,  J.  W,,
                             Slaglan,  E. G.,  Suhadl,  F.,  et al..  Journal of Applied Bacteriology,  Vol.  36,  No.
                             September 1973,  PP 1*37-W*0.
3,
                                      Samples of  mud,  sand,  coral,  gravel,  snails,  scallops,  oysters,  sea slugs,
                             crabs, limpets, shrimps,  starfish,  octopus, and 13  species  of bony fish were collected
                             from Java and Ball and examined for Clostridium botullnum.  The  organism  was detected
                             in 10 percent of »n enrichment cultures tested with types  A and C  predominating.

                             INDEX TERMS!  Pollutant identification, Sediments, Marine animals,  Clostridium botulinum,
 See also:  Category  2,  AMIC-9UO2, 91*19, 91*36.
                                                                                        55

-------
                                                                            IffiTHODS AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
  AMIC-9395
  "DETERWNftriON OF FATTY ACID COMPOEITIOH BY. GAS CHROMMnGRAFHY.:  I.  AH/VLYSIS WITH USE
  OF THERMAL CONDUCTIVITr DETECTOR", Watanabe, S., Hayano, S., Aklya, T., et al., Journal
  of the American Oil Chemists' Society. Vol. 50, Ho. 9, September 1973, pp 357-35?!

           Gis chronatographs with thermal detectors were used by a collaborative study
  team to carry out replicate analyses or fatty acids for the purpose of establishing
  standard methods.  Statistical methods were used to determine:  (1) the relationship
  between operating conditions of the equipment and deviation from real  values or
  scattering of data,  (2) whether the difficulty In making peak measurements accounted
  for scattering of values,  (3) the effect of enlarging peak size by adjusting attenuator
  range or chart speed,  and C1*) the effect of using response correction  factors.  From
  the results  of the four collaborative works it was found that deviation of analytical
  values from  exact composition and Inter-laboratory scattering of data nay be considerably
  decreased by the  following means:   (1) enlarging the size of narrow peaks (leas than 5
 mm at a half height) or peaks with low height by adjusting the attenuator range or chart
  speed; (3) correcting  the  analytical values by using correction factors determined from
 analysis  of known mixtures having  composition similar to that of an unknown sample.

 INDEX IEKH3:  Gas chronetogr^phy.  Standard  methods,  Collaborative studies.  Accuracy.
 AKEC-9UOJ*
 "WO-ICTEL SKIP-LOT SAMPLE*} FLAMS - OPERATIHG CHARACTERISTIC  PROPERTIES"
 Journal of Quality Technology. Vol. 5, Ho. k, October 1973,  pp 160-166.
Perry, R. L.,
         Skip-lot sampling plans are a system of lot-inspection plans which allow
 skipping Inspection of a fraction of the samples when the quality history shows that
 the product Is good.  The operating characteristics of three  two-level skip-lot
 sampling plans are described.  Basically the procedures Involve normal Inspection until
 a certain nujAer of lota are accepted at which time skip-lot  sampling Is effected.
 If a given number of additional lots are accepted,  a second skip-lot sampling scheme is
 used.  If an Item is rejected, the sampling procedure reverts to the original inspection
 scheme.  The three procedures tested were compared  to show the  shortcomings and benefits
 of each.  The plans can reduce the amount of inspection required when quality is good
 and adjust the amount of reduction according to the level  of  submitted quality.

 IHDEX OEFMS:  Quality control, Sampling,  Statistical methods, Skip lot sampling.
AMIC-9396
"DETEfWIKATION OF FATTY ACID COMPOSITION BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY:   II.  AKALYSIS WITH USE
OF FLAME IONIZATION DETECTOR", Watanabe, S., Nakasato, S.,  Hayano,  S.,  et al., Journal
of the American Oil Chemists' Society, Vol. 5O, No. 9, September 1973,  PP
          Gas chromatographs with flame lonlzation detectors were used in collaborative
analyses of known mixtures of four or five fatty acid methyl  esters.   The resulting
data  were treated statistically to examine the Inter - and intralaboratory scatter and
the effect of using correction factors.  Average values in some  cases  did not approach
actual  values even when only data with small deviations were accepted.  In some
laboratories a sort of regularity was observed in the deviation  of analytical values
from  real values  throughout the analyses of four samples.  The application of
correction factors to th« analytical values obtained by these laboratories resulted In
a considerable decrease of InterlaboratOry scattering and deviation from the real
values.   When a constant amount of sample was injected, intralaboratory scattering was
decreased, whereas InterlaboratOry scattering was not.  Injection of large sample sizes
caused deviation.  From this collaborative study it was recommended that 0.5-1.0
aicrollter of 20 percent solution be injected.

IMDEX TERMS:  Gas chronatography, Fatty acids, Collaborative  studies.  Sample size.
"OHE-UAY ANALYSIS OF VARIAHCE", Olsson, D. M., Journal of Quality Technology.  Vol.  5,
Ho. U, October 1973, PP 191-193.

         A computer program for one-way analysis of variance is described.   The
advantages of the program arei  (l) flexible, easy-to-use input; (2)  averages  and
standard deviations of  averages within treatment variances ind residuals can be
calculated; (3)  analysis of variance can be tabulated and the treatment  component of
variance can be  estimated;  and (U) the probability of exceeding the calculated
treatment F-ratio can be provided.

IHDEX TERMS:   Computer  programs. Data processing. Analysis of variance.
See alao:  Category  1,  AMC-9288
           Category  3,  AMXC-92W,  956**.
                                                                                       56

-------
                                                                             5.  IHSTRCMSm1 DEVELOPMENT
 AMIC-92U7
 "POTENTIOSTATIC COULOMETRIC DETERMINATION OF VANADIUM, VANADIUM-MANGANESE AND
 VANADIUM-IRON MIXTURES ANT THE INFLUENCE OP CHROMIUM ON THE  PROCESS",  Bishop, E.,
 Hitchcock, P. H., Analyst, Vol. 98, No. 1169, August 1973, PP 572-579.
          A simple coulometric cell was constricted and a  ccnmercial potentlostat was
 adapted for use in determining V, V-Mn, and V-Fe In various  media.   Since current
 integration by strip-chart recorder was inadequate, an RC integration system was con-
 structed from polystyrene capacitors.  Pretreatments of electrolytes and electrodes are
 described.  Vanadium (V) was determined at minus 0.128 V  in  acetate buffer and at plwa
 0.2U7 V in 2.0 M sulphuric acid, in the latter with a relative standard deviation of
 0.27 percent and a 95 percent confidence level result of  0.1008 to  0.1011 M compared
 with 0.1012 M for a standard solution.  Chromlum(VI) suppressed all reduction at
 pH  1* 0  and reduced simultaneously vith vanadium in sulphuric  acid.   Minganese(VII)
 reduced to aanganese(III) in the first step at plus 0.7 V at pH 3.5 and manganese(III)
 and vanadium(V)  simultaneously reduced In second step at  minus 0.12 V.   The  separation
 of  iron(lll)  was possible at plus 0.9 V but inpracticable; simultaneous reduction at
plus O.25  V in 2.0 M sulphuric acid followed by re-oxidation of the iron(II) at plus
 1.0 V is reconmended.

 INDEX TERMS:   Vanadium,  Voltanmetry,  Chemical interference. Vanadium, Voltannietry.
AMIC-9385
"AN INEXPENSIVE,  FAST XESPONSE CURRENT SPEED INDICATOR", Byrne, E. J., Boon, J. D., Ill,
Chesapeake Science.  Vol.  H>, No. 3, September 1973, PP 217-219-
         A low cost,  fast response current speed sensor consists of a bearing supported
axial rotor  inside  a  cylindrical duct.  The rotation rate of the impeller is obtained
by counting  the number of closures of a magnetic proximity switch, mounted on the duct,
which is actuated by  the passage of smali magnets bonded to the impeller.  The signal
is transmitted to a surface counter, a high-speed electromechanical counter and a
solid state  pulse generator,  by the conductor suspension cable.  The sensor output Is
linear over  the calibration range of 0 to 150 cm/sec.  Threshold speed is about 1.5
cm/sec   Field usage  indicates the device will be useful for shallow water applications
In hydraulics  and ecology.   Total cost to construct the unit is estimated to be about
200 dollars.

INDEX TERMS:   Design, «Costs,  Calibrations,  Current meters, Detection limits.
A«C-9)189
"X-Y RECORDERS",  Measurements and Data, Vol. 7, No. 5, September /October 1973,
PP 99-103-

         Accuracy,  speed,  dimensions, costs, manufacturers, and other pertinent
information are listed for commercially available X-Y recorders operating with analog
signals.

INDEX TERMS:  Costs, X-Y recorders.
AMIC-9U90
"EAGLE EYE - NEW FLOWMETER",  Plache, K.
September/October 1973,   PP 10^-106.
0., Measurements and CKta,  Vol.  7,  No.  5,
         The Eagle Eye flowmeter uses an  "Annubar1 primary flow element as the flow
sensor and a new Indicator designed specifically for use with the sensor.   Basically,
the sensor transmits a pressure  signal to a diaphragn which converts axial motion to
the pivotal notion of a range  spring.  The motion of the range spring is transmitted to
the meter pointer by means of  a  permanent (stator) mapiet on the range spring ind a
follower magnet on the pointer.  Several advantages of the system <>re:  readout is
direct and close to linear; the  sensor is available in sizes of 1/2 inch to l8o inches
and does not require complicated engineering; pressure loss is low; iccurncy ind
dependability are high;  measurements can be made with dirty liquids; readings cin be
remote from the measurement site; and cost is competitive with those of other
flowmeters.

INDEX TERMS:  Design, Flowmeters.

-------
                                                                             5.   INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT
 AMIC-9576
 "EVALUATION OF THE FERRIC LON SENSITIVE CHALCOGENIDE GLASS ELECTRODE",  Jasinakl, R.,
 Tmchtenberg, I., Journal of the Electrochemical Society. Vol. 120, No. 9,  September
 1973, PF n69-ll7k.

          Further information is presented  on  the preparation, composition,  performance,
 and ferric ion sensing mechanism of chalcogenide glass FenSe60Ge28Sbl2  (where n falls
 between 1.3 and 2).  Properly prepared and activated electrodes responded to changes in
 ferric ion concentration in perchlorate, chloride,  and nitrate solutions with an
 average Nernstian slope of 57.6 plus or minus 2.9 mV/decade,  over the concentration
 range of 0.01-0.00001 M ferric Ion (based  on  16  electrodes).   Useful response is found
 down to at least 0.000001 M Fe(3 plus).  Details are presented on the activation and
 operating procedures.  Although a complete evaluation Of the  sensing mechanism  has  not
 beer, made,  it has been established that the activation process involves both an
 oxidation of the fresh surface as well as  a chemical interaction of this surface with
 ferric iron from solution.   The sensing process  then involves exchange  of ferric Iron
 with this modified surface.
INDEX TERMS:
      Ferric
 Iron, Aqueous solutions,  Ion selective electrodes,  Detection limits,
ions.
AMIC-9579
'GUIDE TO SELECTING  DIGITAL MULTIPLEXERS", Krigman, A., Instruments and Control
Systems, Vol. U6, No.  11,  November 1973, PP 63-68.

         Time division and frequency division multiplexing parameters for consideration
in selecting multiplexing systems are discussed.  A reference guide to multiplexers,
their capabilities,  and manufacturers are included.

INDEX TERMS:  Data transmission, Multiplexers.
                                                                              AMIC-9580
                                                                              "DIGITAL MAGNETIC RECORDING OF WIDEBAND ANALOG SIGNALS", Spitzer, C. F., Computer Design.
                                                                              Vol.  12,  No.  10,  October 1973, PP 93-90.
         Digitization of a signal offers significant advantages when that  signal
exceeds the analog bandwidth of the recorder or when unacceptable  signal degradations
occur due to noise contamination, crosstalk or spurious  signals, limited dynamic range,
and perturbations of the recorder's timebase.   If the signal is sampled and digitized,
an error is necessarily incurred since that signal will  probably not have  been at an
exact quantizing level.  The rms value of the  resultant  digitizing error,  or
quantization noise, results in a peak-to-peak  signal to  rms  error  ratio of S/N ratio
equals (10.8 plus 6m) dB, where m is the number of bits  per  sample.   This  expression
is valid for unstructured signals.   In the case of structured signals (eg, TV),
undesirable effects can be removed by artificially introducing white noise of a
magnitude of two or three quantization steps.   There are numerous  methods  for varying
degrees of compression and signal deterioration.   A factor of six  seems feasible for
image transmission.  Proper selection of a recording code can also aid In  minimizing
bandwidth requirements.  Care must be taken in ADC and DAC selection to prevent
converter problems from degrading the system significantly.   For many future recording
applications,  the advantages of pulse code modulation recording of analog  signals are
expected to outweigh the drawbacks  of higher equipment complexity.

INDEX TERMS:  Data processing,  Electronic equipment,  Signal conditioning.
                                                                              AMIC-9581
                                                                              "ENERGY SIGNATURE  MEASURES SYSTEM CHANGES", Bailey, S. J.,  Control Engineering.
                                                                              Vol.  20,  Ho. 10, October 1973, pp U5-W.

                                                                                       New equipment has been developed which follows system changes by monitoring
                                                                              changes in  input power.  The instrument captures transient  data and displays it  for
                                                                              field comparison,  detects trends in process deviation from  norm,  and preprocesses
                                                                              frequency spectra  for later detailed computer analysis.   Its basic function Is to  aid
                                                                              in determination of frequency components whose telltale variation from proper to
                                                                              improper  operation make them valuable in the performance of automatic 'machine minding.'
                                                                              Machining,  forming, mixing, welding, and powder compression processes have been
                                                                              monitored by this  procedure.  Other potential applications  exist where pmnps, valves,
                                                                              or other  mechanically driven devices are involved.

                                                                              INDEX TERMS:  Control systems, Process control.
                                                                                        58

-------
                                                                              5.   INSTRUMENT  DEVELOPMENT
  AMIC-9582
  "ON-LINE SIGHAL DIGITIZING FOR COMPUTER INPUT",  Zarcades, P. A., Control Engineering.
  Vol. 20, Ho. 10, October 1973, PP U8-51.

           Advantages, disadvantages, and problems of various techniques for
  conditioning, measuring, converting, and  transferring analog data for input  to
  digital computers are presented.

j  INDEX TEFMS:  Data processing. Signal conditioning.  Analog-to-digital.
 AMIC-9583
 "LOW-COST DIGITAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTENE", Kompass, E.  J., Control Engineering,
 Vol. 20, No.  11,  November 1973, PP 58-61,

          The  capabilities of low-cost digital data acquisition systems from UO
 manufacturers are reviewed.  The equipment is categorized according to available
 features.

 INDEX TERMS:   Data processing. Data acquisition systems.
 "COMPUTER ANALYSIS OF DATA FROM POTENTIOMETRIC TITRATIONS  USIHG ION-SELECTIVE
 INDICATOR ELECTRODES", labell, A. F.,  Jr.,  Pecsok,  R.  L.,  Davies,  R.  H.,  et al.,
 Analytical Chemistry, Vol. U5, No. lU, December 1973,  PP 2363-2369.

          Although ion-selective electrode potentiometry simplifies end point
 determinations for many titrations and permits seme previously Impractical titrations,
 frequent electrode calibration is necessary.   A computer program,  TITRATE, has been
 developed which permits an accurate end-point determination for all titrations in which
 a few of the data points lie in a concentration region where meaningful potentials can
 be recorded.  This computer technique  locates the equivalence  point in precipitation
 an! complexation titrations in which either the analyte or titrant is electroactlve.
 TITRATE analyzes only the meaningful data and computes the analyte concentration, the
 fraction of ideal Nerastlan response,  and the electrode formal potential.   In addition,
 standard deviations,  a comprehensive error  analysis, and data  which facilitate plotting
 both signold and linear titration curves are  computed.   The  versatility of
 ion-selective electrode potentiometry  Is enhanced by permitting the analysis of Ions for
 which electrodes exist plus species  which rapidly form precipitates or  complexes with
 such Ions.   Examples  of three  argentometric titrations  using a  silver ion-selective
 electrode are presented.   The  analysis time is  not extreme,  and all data analysis is
 performed by computer.  Execution  time for the  complete analysis of data for one
 titi«.tion is usually between 1 and 2 seconds  on an IBM  360/65 computer  making the cost
 for computer tine minimal.

 IKDEX  TERMS:   Computer programs, Data processing. Ion selective  electrodes,
       Ion selective electrodes, Potentiometric  titration, Data  interpretation,  TITRATE,
      Electroactive species,
AMIC-9611
 "COMEVTERIZED DIGITAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM FOB THERKJGRAVIMETKY AND SIMILAR
APPLICATIONS", Romeo, 0., Ufshin, E., Ciccarelli, M. F., et al., Analytical
Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, No. 1^, December 1973, PP
         The data-recording method used in conjunction with continuous thermogravimetric
analysis and precision electro-balances usually involves the use of a pen-recorder
which can be coupled with an automatic range expander.  The pen-recorder usually has a
series of shortcomings which prove to be quite inconvenient to correct.   As an
alternativ to the use of pen-recorders, 9. package has been designed which consists of
a digital voltmeter (DVM), an interval timer,  an elasped time clock, and a teletype
equipped with a digital data controller.  A block diagram and the operation sequence
Of this digital system are presented.   In addition to the application to
thermogravimetry, the digital data acquisition system can be used for monitoring =nd
recording a variety of phenomena which involve either time-dependent parameters  or,  in
general, up to three independent variables.  All system components are commercially
available as building blocks.  Assembling of the system using commercial modules
should be done with minimal design by  any competent electronic staff.

INDEX TERJ6:  Computer programs, Automatic control.  Data transmission. Data collections.
      Fabrication, Programming languages,  Electronic equipment,  Thermogravimetric
      analysis, Data acquisition, FORTRAN,  Digital display.
                                                                                         59

-------